Catalog D21.7 - NEMA - (Part 1) - SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules

SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Modules
North American Edition
SINAMICS Drives
Catalog
D 21.7
Part 1
2013
Answers for industry.
The Engineering Manual
Related Catalogs
SINAMICS S120
D21.3 • 2011
Chassis Units and Cabinet Modules (IEC)
SINAMICS S150
Drive Converter Cabinet Units (IEC)
SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual
SINAMICS S120
Chassis Format Units and
Cabinet Modules
SINAMICS S150
Converter Cabinet Units
Catalog D 21.3 • 2011
Engineering Manual for SINAMICS G130 Drive Chassis,
SINAMICS G150 Enclosed Drives, SINAMICS S120 Drive
Chassis, SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules, SINAMICS S150
Enclosed Drives
E86060-K5521-A131-A3-7600
DRCA-21300-0412
SINAMICS Drives
Answers for industry.
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and
Motors for Production Machines
Catalog PM 21 • 2011
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and
Motors for Production Machines
Catalog PM 21 • 2011
SINAMICS S120
Chassis Format Units and
Cabinet Modules
SINAMICS S150
Converter Cabinet Units
Catalog D 21.3 • 2011
E86060-K4921-A101-A2-7600
DRCA-K4921-0111
SINAMICS G150 NEMA
Enclosed Drives
Motion Control
Answers for industry.
D11.7.1 • 2013
SINAMICS Drives
DRCA-D1171-0313
Answers for industry.
SINAMICS G150
NEMA Enclosed Drives
SINAMICS Drives
Siemens Industry, Inc.
3333 Old Milton Parkway
Alpharetta, GA 30005
1-800-241-4453
[email protected]
www.usa.siemens.com/drives
Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No: DRCA-D1171-0313
All rights reserved.
Printed in USA.
©2013 Siemens Industry, Inc.
The information provided in this brochure contains merely general
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use
do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further
development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective
characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract.
Catalog
D 11.7
Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies. Specificationsare subject to change
without notice.
Part 1
2013
Answers for industry.
SINAMICS G130
D11 • 2011
Drive Converter Chassis Units
SINAMICS G150
Drive Converter Cabinet Units (IEC)
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
Catalog D 11 • 2011
E86050-K5511-A101-A5-7600
DRCA-D1100-0412
SINAMICS and Motors for
Single-Axis Drives
SINAMICS Drives
Answers for industry.
SINAMICS and Motors
for Single-Axis Drives
Catalog D 31 • 2012
D31 • 2012
E86050-K5531-A101-A1-7600
DRCA-D3112-0412
This manual offers users comprehensive support for the
configuring of drives and associated system components.
Motion Control Drives
Answers for industry.
Low Voltage AC Motors
D81.2 • 2012
Selection and Pricing Guide, USA Edition
Low Voltage AC Motors
Selection and Pricing Guide
Catalog D81.2 - 2012, USA Edition
NMPC-00600-0212
SIMOTICS NEMA Motors
www.usa.siemens.com/nema-motors
E86060-K5581-A111-A4-7600
SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors
Type series 1LE, 1PC, 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Frame sizes 63 to 450
Power range 0.09 to 1250 kW
Catalog D 81.1 • January 2012
E86060-K5512-A101-A3-7600
t i o n a l Ef f i c i
en
IE changeover
Premium Ef ficiency
The first three chapters are devoted primarily to the
fundamental physical principles of variable speed electric
drives and include EMC Installation Guidelines as well as
general system descriptions and planning information
which relate to all products in the SINAMICS range. The
other chapters then discuss in detail questions relating to
the dimensioning of specific drive models as well as the
selection of suitable motors.
High Ef ficiency
Standard Ef ficiency
Motors
Answers for industry.
SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150
Medium Voltage Converters D12 • 2012
na
In
t
er
cy
SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors (IEC)
D81.1 • 2012
Frame sizes 63 to 450
Power range 0.09 to 1250 kW
The engineering manual is divided into the following chapters:
- Fundamental Principles and System Description
- EMC Installation Guideline
- General Engineering Information for SINAMICS
- SINAMICS G130 Converter Chassis Units
- SINAMICS G150 Converter Cabinet Units
- SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules
- SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
- Drive Dimensioning
- Motors
Note:
The engineering manual is not available as a printed hard
copy, but only as an electronic file in PDF format.
SINAMICS Drives
SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Modules
North American Edition
Introduction
The SINAMICS drives family
1
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet
Modules system overview
2
NEMA/UL and IEC versions
UL listing of a Cabinet Module line-up
System configuration guidelines
Catalog D21.7 (part 1) • 2013
Line Modules
Line Connection Modules
Basic Line Modules
Smart Line Modules
Active Line Modules
Quality
The products and
systems described
in this catalog
are produced/
distributed in
accordance with
the requirements
of a quality
management
system which has
been certified to
ISO 9001:2008.
© Siemens AG 2013
Motor Modules
Motor Modules chassis format
Motor Modules booksize format
Braking Modules (chassis mounted)
Braking Modules (motor modules)
Auxiliary Modules, Options
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Custom Cabinet Modules
Integration Engineering
Description of Options
Engineering Information
Technical Data
Characteristic curves (derating, overloads)
Control units and interfaces
Sensor and I/O modules
Connection system – Signal Cables
Safety Integrated
Engineering Tools,
Services & Support
Engineering Software
Service & Support
3
4
5
6
7
SINAMICS Drives
One Family, One Source, All Applications
Application
SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for
industrial applications that offers solutions for all drive tasks:
Basic pump and fan applications in the process industry.
Complex single-motor drives in centrifuges, presses,
extruders, elevators, as well as conveyor and transport
systems
Coordinated drive line-ups for textile, plastic film, and paper machines, as well as for rolling mills
High precision servo drives for machining
Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing machines
Product variants
The SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for all drive tasks:
SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications, mostly with induction motors, that have less stringent requirements on the dynamic performance.
SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous or induction motors and fulfills the most stringent
requirements regarding
- the dynamic performance and control accuracy
- integration of extensive technological functions in the drive control system.
SINAMICS DCM is the DC drive in the SINAMICS family. It can be configured to address both basic as well as demanding drive applications.
0/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation
All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept.
Common hardware and software components, as well
as standardized tools for design, configuration, and
commissioning tasks ensure high-level integration across
all components. SINAMICS covers the full range of drive
applications. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily
combined with each other.
SINAMICS is part of the Siemens “Totally Integrated
Automation” concept. Integrated SINAMICS systems covering
engineering, data management and communication at the
automation level, result in extremely cost effective solutions
based on SIMOTION (motion control), SINUMERIK (machine
tool) and SIMATIC (PLC and DCS) control systems.
Quality management to ISO 9001
SINAMICS meets the highest quality requirements.
Comprehensive quality assurance measures in all development,
engineering and production processes ensure a consistently
high level of quality.
Of course, our quality management systems are certified by
independent authorities in accordance with ISO 9001.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
5
Introduction
1/2 The members of the SINAMICS
drives family
SINAMICS low voltage drives
SINAMICS DC drives
SINAMICS medium voltage drives
The SINAMICS S120 range
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
1
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
1
Introduction
The SINAMICS drives family
SINAMICS low voltage drives
SINAMICS G110
SINAMICS G120
SINAMICS G110D
SINAMICS G120D
The versatile single motor drive
for low power ratings
The modular single motor
drive for low up to medium
power ratings
The distributed single motor
drive for basic solutions
The distributed single motor drive
for high performance
380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC
0.15 to 400 HP
(0.37 to 250 kW)
380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC
1 to 10 HP
(0.75 to 7.5 kW)
380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC
1 to 10 HP
(0.75 to 7.5 kW)
Machine and plants for industrial
and commercial applications
Horizontal conveyor
applications,main focus on
distribution and logistics in
airports; suitable for basic
conveyor-related tasks with
local control or connected to
a bus via ASInterface
Conveyor applications in industrial
environments, main focus on the automotive industry; also suitable for
high-performance applications e.g.
at airports and in the food, beverage
and tobacco industry
•Pumps
•Fans
•Compressors
•Conveyor systems
•Airports
•Distribution logistics
•Conveyor systems
•Electric monorail system in
distribution Logistics
•Compact
•Can be flexibly adapted to
different applications
•Simple and fast commissioning
•Clear terminal layout
•Optimum interaction with SIMATIC and LOGO!
•Modular
•Can be flexibly expanded
•Safety Integrated
•Simple and fast commissioning
•Regenerative feedback
•Innovative cooling concept
•Optimum interaction with
SIMOTION and SIMATIC
•Low profile design with standard footprint, IP65
•Easy, fast commissioning
•Optional key-operated
disconnect switch
•AS-Interface with bus
parameterization
•Quick stop function
•Integrated brake control
•Optimum interaction with
SIMATIC and LOGO!
•Low profile design with standard footprint, IP65
•Modular
•Can be flexibly expanded
•Easy, fast commissioning
•Regenerative feedback
•Optimum interaction with
SIMOTION and SIMATIC
•SINAMICS Safety Integrated
Catalog D31
Catalog D31
Catalog D31
Catalog D31
Typical ratings
230 V 1 ph. AC in / 3 ph. out
0.15 to 4 HP
(0.12 to 3 kW)
Main applications
Machine and plants for industrial
and commercial applications
Application examples
•Simple pumps and fans
•Auxiliary drives
•Conveyor systems
•Billboards
•Door/gate operating mechanisms
Highlights
1/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Introduction
The SINAMICS drives family
SINAMICS low voltage drives
SINAMICS G120E
SINAMICS G130
SINAMICS G150
SINAMICS G150 NEMA
The versatile enclosed drive for
low to medium power ratings
The modular single motor drive
solution for drives with a high
power rating
The universal enclosed drive
solution for drives with a high
power rating
The universal high power
enclosed drive solution per
North American standards
380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC
100 to 800 HP
(75 to 560 kW)
380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC
100 to 1,250 HP
(75 to 2,700 kW)
380 to 600 V 3 ph. AC
150 to 800 HP
(110 to 560 kW)
Applications in the process and
production industry, including
power stations, oil and gas,
petrochemicals, paper, cement,
stone, metals
Applications in the process and
production industry, including
power stations, oil and gas,
petrochemicals, paper, cement,
stone, metals
Applications in the process and
production industry, including power
stations, oil and gas,
petrochemicals, paper, cement,
stone, metals
•Pumps and fans
•Compressors
•Extruders and mixers
•Crushers
•Grinding mills
•Kilns
•Test stands
•Pumps and fans
•Compressors
•Extruders and mixers
•Crushers
•Grinding mills
•Marine propulsion
•Test stands
•Pumps and fans
•Compressors
•Extruders and mixers
•Crushers
•Grinding mills
•Kilns
•Test stands
•Ready to connect and run
•Flexibility based on G120
modular components
•Optional power regeneration
•UL508C listed
•Safety Integrated
•Optimum interaction with
SIMOTION and SIMATIC
•Modular components
•Space-saving
•Low noise
•Easy, quick commissioning
•Optimum interaction with SIMATIC
•Safety Integrated
•Ready to connect and run
enclosed drive per IEC standards
•Broad power range
•Space-saving
•Low noise
•Easy, quick commissioning
•Optimum interaction with SIMATIC
•Safety Integrated
•Ready to connect and run
enclosed drive per NEMA/ANSI standards
•Optional listing to UL508A
•Low noise
•Easy, quick commissioning
•Safety Integrated
–
Catalog D11
Catalog D11
Catalog D11.7 Part 1
Typical ratings
380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC
1 to 200 HP
(0.75 to 132 kW)
Main applications
Standard and regenerative
industrial applications in water,
chemicals, oil and gas, packaging,
paper, metals, minerals and others
Application examples
•Pumps and fans
•Compressors
•Conveyors
•Mixers
•Kilns
Highlights
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
1/3
1
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
1
Introduction
The SINAMICS drives family
SINAMICS low voltage drives
SINAMICS DC drives
SINAMICS S110
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S150
SINAMICS DCM
The basic positioning drive for
single axis applications
The flexible, modular applied
drive system for demanding
drive tasks
The drive solution for demanding
high power single motor drives
The scalable drive system for basic
and demanding applications
380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC
0.15 to 5,000 HP
(0.12 to 4,500 kW)
380 to 690 V 3 ph. AC
100 to 1,250 HP
(75 to 1,200 kW)
85 to 950 V 3 ph. AC
5 to 24,000 HP
(4 kW to 18 MW)
High performance applications in
all industries, including coordinated
multi-motor drive systems and
very high power single drives,
motion control (positioning,
synchronization).
High performance, fully
regenerative standalone drive
applications requiring clean
power (low harmonics,
controllable power factor)
Industrial applications in metals,
plastics, printing, paper, cranes,
mining, oil and gas, for new
installations and retrofits.
•Machine tools
•Production machines:
•Presses
•Converting applications
•Handling equipment
•Paper machines
•Rolling mills
•Marine applications
•Test bays
•Centrifuges
•Elevators and cranes
•Cross cutters and shears
•Downhill conveyor belts
•Presses
•Cable winches
•Rolling mills
•Cross cutters and shears
•Wire-drawing machines
•Extruders and kneaders
•Presses
•Elevators and cranes
•Cableways and lifts
•Mine hoists
•Scalable ratings, functionality,
number of axes, performance
•Easy commissioning,
auto-configuration
•Innovative system architecture
•Wide range of motors
•Optimum interaction with
SIMOTION, SIMATIC and
SINUMERIK
•Safety Integrated
•Flexible and modular
•Choice of rectifier types
•Fully scalable - ratings,
functionality, number of axes, performance
•Auto-configuration
•Wide range of motors
•Optimum interaction with
SIMOTION, SIMATIC and
SINUMERIK
• Safety Integrated
•Air or liquid cooled
•Ready to connect and run
•High control accuracy and
dynamic response
•Low harmonics, exceeding
IEEE 519 requirements
•Tolerant of line voltage
fluctuations
•Reactive power
compensation option
•Safety Integrated
• Choice of Control Units
•Integrated field power supply
•Free function blocks and Drive Control Chart
•Expandable functionality using SINAMICS components
•Single-phase connection possible
Catalog D31
Catalogs PM21, D21.3, D21.7
Catalog D21.3
Catalog D23.1
Typical ratings
380 to 480 V 3 ph. AC
0.15 to 125 HP
(0.12 to 90 kW)
Main applications
Machine and plants in the
industrial environment, where
machine axes should be quickly
and precisely positioned in the
simplest possible way.
Application examples
•Handling equipment
•Assembly machines
•Laboratory automation
•Metalworking, ceramics, glass, woodworking, printing machines
•Plastics processing machines
Highlights
1/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Introduction
The SINAMICS drives family
SINAMICS medium voltage drives
SINAMICS GM150
SINAMICS SM150
SINAMICS GL150
SINAMICS SL150
The universal drive solution
for single motor drives
The drive solution for
demanding single and multimotor drives
The drive solution for
synchronous motors at
high power ratings
The drive solution for low speed
motors with the highest torques
and overloads
3.3 kV 3 ph. AC
5,000 to 24,000 HP
(4 to 17.5 MW)
Up to 12 kV 3 ph. AC
up to 100,000 HP
(up to 75 MW)
1 to 4 kV 3 ph. AC
3,000 to 36,000 HP
(2.2 to 27 MW)
High performance and multi motor applications in metals
and mining
High power and high speed
applications in the process
industries, especially in oil and
gas and petrochemicals
High power and low speed
applications especially in the
metals and mining sectors
•Hot and cold rolling stands
•Mine hoists
•Test stand drives
•Downhill and cross country conveyor belts
•Compressors
•Pumps and fans
•Extruders and kneaders
•Marine drives
•Blast furnace blowers
• Hot rolling mill roughing stands
•Mine hoists
•Ore and cement mills
•Excavators
•Space-saving
•Easy, quick commissioning
•Ready to connect and run
enclosed drive
•Optimum interaction with SIMATIC
•Air and liquid cooled versions
•Four quadrant (regenerative) operation as standard
•High degree of efficiency and operation that reduces stress on the motor
•High control accuracy and dynamic response
•Almost no line harmonics
•Reactive power compensation option
•Easy, quick commissioning
•Ready to connect and run enclosed drive
•Optimum interaction with SIMATIC
•Air and liquid cooled versions
•Compact design and high
power density
•Simple operator control and monitoring
•Extremely rugged, reliable in
operation and almost
maintenance free
•Two directions of rotation by reversing the rotating field
•Can be seamlessly integrated into higher level automation systems
•Air and liquid cooled versions
• Low output frequency for low speed motors
•High short-time overload
capability
•Four-quadrant operation as standard
•Extremely rugged, reliable
in operation and almost
maintenance free
•High efficiency
•Can be seamlessly integrated into higher level automation systems
•Air and liquid cooled versions
Catalog D12
Catalog D12
—
—
Typical ratings
2.3 to 4.16 kV 3 ph. AC
1,200 to 11,500 HP
(1 to 8.5 MW)
Main applications
General purpose applications in the
process industries
Application examples
•Pumps and fans
•Compressors
•Extruders and mixers
•Grinding mills
•Marine drives
Highlights
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
1/5
1
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
1
Introduction
The SINAMICS S120 range
Drives for single axis applications
Drives for multi axis applications
Blocksize format
Chassis format
Booksize format
Chassis format
Cabinet Modules
Catalog PM 21
Catalogs D21.3
and PM21
Catalog PM 21
Catalogs D21.3
and PM21
This Catalog and
D21.3
SINAMICS S120 is the modular drive system with vector and
servo control that is ideal for demanding drive tasks in plant
and machine construction.
Multi-axis drive solutions with higher-level motion control can
be implemented with the modular SINAMICS S120 system
just the same as solutions for single-axis drives.
Covering a power range from 0.12 kW to 4500 kW and various control modules with a graduated range of functions,
the modular SINAMICS S120 system can be used to simply
and quickly create a precisely tailored drive configuration –
for almost any demanding drive application.
On the SINAMICS S120, the drive intelligence is combined
with closed-loop control functions into Control Units. These
units are capable of controlling drives in the vector, servo and
V/Hz modes. They also perform the speed and torque control
functions plus other intelligent drive functions for all axes.
Using the available closed-loop control techniques, both synchronous as well as induction motors can be operated,
and therefore the complete range of low-voltage motors from Siemens.
Integrated PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET interfaces are available. These interfaces ensure easy integration into complete automation solutions.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are available in an enclosed
version. Individual enclosed modules can be combined to
form drive lineups with including the full range of SINAMICS
S120 power ratings. Standardized interfaces enable the
modules to be linked quickly to create a ready-to-connect
drive solution for multi-motor applications.
Benefits
Applications
SINAMICS S120 is characterized by the following properties:
For high-performance single and multi-axis applications
Versatile and flexible
Wide range of power ratings
Wide range of functions, including Safety Integrated
Supports various cooling types (air/liquid-cooled)
Supports various infeed concepts
Can be simply integrated into higher-level
automation and IT environments
User-friendly engineering
Ease of handling
Simple installation
Practical connection system
SINAMICS S120 vector control is recommended for drive solutions with continuous material webs, for example,
wire-drawing machines, film and paper machines, as well as for hoisting gear, centrifuges and test stand drives.
1/6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Servo control with SINAMICS S120 is employed for cyclic
processes with both precise and highly dynamic closed-loop
position control.
With SINAMICS S120, more performance is integrated into
machines that are used in many sectors, such as:
Packaging, Textile, Printing and paper machines
Presses and punches
Machines used in the woodworking, glass and
ceramics industries
Hoisting gear and cranes
Handling and assembly systems
Machine tools
Rolling mill drives
A broad range of test stand applications
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System Overview 5
2
2/2 Overview of SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Modules
2/3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet
Modules – A Global Product
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module
designs to NEMA vs to IEC standards
2/4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet
Modules – NEMA/UL version
Overview of voltage and power ratings
2/4
UL listing of a SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Module line-up
2/5
System configuration guidelines
Selection and basic configuration of
Cabinet Modules
Arranging modules in a line-up
Specifying the DC bus
Transport sections
Options applicable to the line-up
Documentation and integration
engineering
2/7
System design considerations
2/7
Benefits
Siemens D 21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
Overview of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
All drive components are arranged in a clear, compact layout
in the individual Cabinet Modules. They offer great flexibility
for the configuration of drive line-ups, and a comprehensive
array of options allows the systems to be optimally adapted
for specific project, site, environmental, application and performance requirements.
2
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules is a modular system to
configure enclosed drive line-ups with a central line infeed
(rectifier) and common DC bus supplying power to multiple
motor modules (inverters). SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module
line-ups are typically used for either multi motor drive systems
such as for paper machines, rolling mills, certain test stands
and cranes, or for very high HP single drives. This makes it
an ideal supplement to SINAMICS G150 and SINAMICS S150
stand-alone enclosed drives.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are based on the SINAMICS
S120 range of components. Chassis format power modules
for line and motor modules are housed in individual cabinets.
Also available are booksize motor modules, with several booksize module kits mounted in a booksize base cabinet. As standard, a line-up comprises cabinet modules installed
side-by-side in a row. Other configurations (for example,
back-to-back) are available on request.
The main components of the system are:
• Line Connection Modules with line side components such as circuit breakers, fuses, and when required, contactors and line reactors.
• Line Modules for the following variations of line infeed:
- Basic Line Modules for two-quadrant
(nonregenerative) operation
- Smart Line Modules for four-quadrant (fully
regenerative) operation
- Active Line Modules for four-quadrant (fully regenerative) clean power operation, with negligible line harmonics and unity or adjustable power factor.
• The following types of Motor Modules:
- Chassis format (in individual cabinets)
- Booksize kits (mounted in booksize base cabinets)
• Control units
• Auxiliary Power Supply Modules to supply accessories
such as blowers and for AC and DC control power.
• Various methods of dynamic braking with external
resistors are possible:
- Braking units mounted inside chassis
- Configuring motor modules as braking modules
- Central braking modules
Standardized power and control interfaces facilitate easy configuration, installation and integration with the
plant. Pre-manufactured connections are provided for
interconnecting the DC bus and auxiliary power between
cabinet modules. Communication between power modules
and control units is done via DRIVE-CLiQ, the flexible
backplane bus.
=
=
=
~
~
~
=
=
~
~
=
=
~
=
=
~
~
=
~
~
G_D211_XX_00203
~
=
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
Example of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for a multi motor drive system
2/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
M
3~
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – A Global Product
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules (S120 CM) is a global
product. However, regional differences in regulations, standards, specifications and voltage levels for power and control require modifications to the packaging (enclosure)
and auxiliary components. SINAMICS S120 CM enclosed drive
line-ups are therefore offered in versions designed to IEC (European) as well as to NEMA (North American) standards.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module designs to NEMA vs.
to IEC standards
All models of SINAMICS S120 CM (NEMA or IEC) use the identical basic drive and electronics components – power
modules of a particular power and voltage rating, CU320-2
control units, CompactFlash cards with firmware, and optional modules of the SINAMICS S120 range (including
for example, SMC30 encoder interface, VSM10 voltage sensing module, CBE20 Ethernet communications module).
Also, the cabinet dimensions and basic layouts are mostly the
same for both versions.
Differences between the NEMA and IEC versions are found in
the configuration of the base units, i.e. the enclosure version
and the scope of auxiliary equipment included (specifically
line side disconnects and short circuit protection), as well as
the offered range of standard and custom options. Cabinet
Modules to IEC and NEMA standards have different order
numbers, to ensure consistency in the mechanical and
electrical interfaces and documentation for a system to the respective standards. Below is an overview of some of the more significant differences between NEMA and IEC versions (not a complete list!).
SINAMICS S120 CM NEMA version
SINAMICS S120 CM IEC version
Voltage ranges
• Up to 600 V with UL listing (690 V without UL)
• Up to 690 V
Base unit
configuration
• Circuit breaker disconnect per NEC/UL for motor
branch circuit protection
• Use of UL listed or recognized components
(including busbar and wiring)
• SCCR up to 100 kA per UL508A
• EMC filter Category C3 for 2nd environment
(industrial) per IEC 61800-3
• Disconnect and short circuit protection per IEC standards
• Components and wiring per IEC standards
• EMC filter Category C3 for 2nd environment
(industrial) per IEC 61800-3
Enclosure options
Base: IP20 (no roof – air discharge upwards)
• NEMA 1 with raised roof (equivalent to IP21)
• NEMA 1 filtered with louvers and dust filters (equivalent to IP23) – min. required for UL listing
• IP43 as for IEC unit
• NEMA 12 (ventilated) – louvers and fine air filters
(equivalent to IP54)
Base: IP20 (no roof – air discharge upwards)
• IP21 (with raised roof)
• IP23 (with top hat, louvers and dust filters)
• IP43 (like IP23, plus 1mm mesh screen)
• IP54 (like IP23, plus fine air filters)
Exclusive standard
options
Only for NEMA version:
•UL/cUL listing of the complete line-up per UL508A
Only for IEC version:
• EMC filter Category C2 for 1st environment
(residential) per IEC 61800-3
Types of dynamic
braking units
• Braking units mounted inside chassis
•Motor modules as central braking units
(Central braking modules are not available with
UL listing)
• Braking units mounted inside chassis
• Motor modules as central braking units
• Central braking modules
Documentation
languages
• Standard English/Spanish
• Option English/French
• Standard English/German
• Option English and either French, Spanish or Italian
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
2/3
2
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules – NEMA/UL version
The following table provides an overview of the voltage ranges and power ratings of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules that
are available for the NEMA/UL version:
2
Cabinet Module type
Input current
Line voltage 380 …. 480 V 3 ph. AC
Line Connection Modules 250 … 3,000 A
Basic Line Modules
365 … 1,630 A
Smart Line Modules
463 … 1,430 A
Active Line Modules
210 … 1,405 A
Motor Modules Booksize
–
Motor Modules Chassis
–
Line voltage 500 …. 600 V 3 ph. AC
Line Connection Modules 280 … 3,000 A
Basic Line Modules
260 … 1,580 A
Smart Line Modules
463 … 1,430 A
Active Line Modules
210 … 1,405 A
Motor Modules Booksize
–
Motor Modules Chassis
–
Line voltage 380 …. 600 V 3 ph. AC
Auxiliary Power Supply
125 ... 250 A
modules
1) Higher
–
300 … 1,880 A
550 … 1,700 A
644 … 1,422 A
–
102 … 1,524 A
Output current Power range 1)
kW @ 460 V
–
–
–
250 … 1,000 kW
–
300 … 900 kW
–
150 … 1,000 kW
9 ... 132 A
4.8 ... 82 kW
210 … 1,405 A 125 … 900 kW
kW @ 575 V
–
–
–
200 … 1,250 kW
–
400 … 1,200 kW
–
450 … 1,150 kW
–
–
85 … 1,270 A
70 … 1,000 kW
HP @ 460 V
–
–
–
–
5 ... 100 HP
150 … 1,150 HP
HP @ 575 V
–
–
–
–
–
100 … 1,250 HP
–
–
–
DC bus voltage
DC bus current
–
510 … 650 V
510 … 650 V
540 … 720 V
510 … 720 V
510 … 720 V
–
420 … 1,880 A
550 … 1,700 A
235 … 1,574 A
11 ... 158 A
252 … 1,686 A
–
675 … 810 V
675 … 810 V
710 … 900 V
–
675 … 900 V
–
–
power ratings can be achieved by connecting up to four identical line modules or motor modules in parallel.
Note regarding 690 V AC:
The components used in Cabinet Modules for a line voltage of 500 - 600 V are rated for 690 V per IEC standards (this includes
the NEMA versions with an order number ending in “U3”). However, operation of these units at nominal line voltages >600 V
(DC bus voltage >900V) invalidates their UL listing.
UL Listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules (NEMA version) can
optionally be UL listed per UL508A, where the entire line-up
is listed as one enclosed industrial control panel. UL listing of
a line-up therefore requires all cabinet modules in the line-up
to be compliant with UL508A.
Every cabinet module therefore needs to be specified with
option code:
n U90 (UL listing per UL508A) or
n
U91 (cUL listing per UL508A for Canada)
In addition, UL508A requires as a minimum a NEMA 1
enclosure, plus all ventilation openings to be fitted with
air filters. Therefore, all cabinets need to be specified with
option code:
n
M23 (NEMA 1 filtered, IP23) as minimum
Also acceptable are options
n
M43 (IP43) and
n
M54 (NEMA 12 ventilated, IP54)
Furthermore, for the factory to apply a UL listing mark to
the Cabinet Module line-up (being the enclosed industrial
control panel per UL508A) it is a prerequisite that Integration
Engineering be ordered for the line-up (refer to page 5/8).
This provides a comprehensive set of drawings and
documentation for the line-up including all electrical and
mechanical interconnections and wiring.
2/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
The short circuit current rating (SCCR) for the line-up is
determined by all components including the line side
components as well as Motor Modules. On the line side,
the SCCR is determined by the Line Connection Module
together with its associated Line Module(s). Refer to the Line
Connection Module section (page 3/4) for SCCR. Some Line
Connection Modules are available with a high SCCR of 84 kA
or 100 kA, with option L70.
SCCR values apply only to the combination of Line
Connection Module with the Basic, Smart or Active Line
Module per the table “Assignment of Line Modules to Line
Connection Modules” on page 3/5.
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules and options (braking units,
output filters) are listed for an SCCR of up to 100 kA when
included in a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up.
The SCCR of the line-up is additionally dependent on the SCCR
of the smallest Motor Module it contains. The maximum value
of the SCCR is determined by the power rating of any Motor
Modules as follows.
Motor Module(s) <600 HP: Motor Module(s) <900 HP: Maximum SCCR 65 kA
Maximum SCCR 84 kA
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
System configuration guidelines
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules is a modular system, where
individual Cabinet Modules are combined into an enclosed
drive line-up. The system provides a great deal of flexibility
and together with a large variety of options allows an almost
infinite number of possible permutations. To ensure that the
end result is a fully functioning system in accordance with
requirements, various aspects need to be considered in the
selection and configuration of individual cabinet modules,
and when specifying how these are to be combined into
a line-up.
Selection and basic configuration of cabinet modules
n
Motor Modules draw power from or generate power to the DC bus, and supply variable voltage and frequency to one or more motors. They are selected based on motor ratings and overloads, application specific duty cycles etc. Motor Modules are available in two formats:
- Chassis format, with each chassis in its own cabinet.
- Booksize format, where Booksize Base Cabinets contain a number of booksize module kits.
n
Line Modules feed power to the DC bus. They are selected based on the power to be drawn from or regenerated into the supply system.
- Basic Line Modules for motoring only.
- Smart or Active Line Modules if power regeneration back to the line is necessary.
- The overall power balance must be considered, for
example, some motors may be motoring while others are regenerating. The energy would be exchanged on
the DC bus and not necessarily back to the line, so the line module is often not sized to provide the sum of the motor module ratings. Only excess power is regenerated back to the line.
- If the ratio of power regenerated to the line is small
compared to the motoring power drawn from the line,
special configurations such as a mix of Basic and Smart Line Modules may be appropriate. (Consult factory).
n
Braking units for dynamic braking dissipate excess DC bus power in braking resistors. They may be needed:
- Either as an alternative to regeneration to the line
- Or, in some applications such as downhill conveyors, in addition to regeneration to allow electrical braking in the event of a power failure.
n
Line Connection Modules connect Line Modules to the
AC power supply, and contain at a minimum, the main
circuit breaker disconnect and usually the semiconductor fuses as required for the short circuit current rating (SSCR) of the line-up. They are selected and configured to match the chosen Line Modules. This requires close attention to ensure that the correct AC bus interconnections and
necessary components are provided.
- Basic and Smart Line Modules generally require specific line reactors, active line modules do not.
- Certain Line Modules (depending on type and rating)
require a contactor or a main circuit breaker to bridge
(bypass) the pre-charge circuit, and to switch the line
module on line after completion of precharge.
n
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules supply auxiliary and control power to the line-up, for example 3-phase and
single phase AC power for the power module blowers,
contactor coils and motorized circuit breakers, and 24 VDC to power control units and other electronics. Auxiliary
power terminal blocks are provided in each cabinet module, with a pre-manufactured cable looping auxiliary power from one cabinet module to the next.
- The Auxiliary Power Supply Module is selected based on the total power requirement of the line-up.
- For small line-ups, auxiliary power supplies can be
provided in the Line Connection Module (options K70
or K76).
- It is also possible to provide auxiliary power from external sources. This is the default – auxiliary power will be provided internally only if specified!
Arranging Cabinet Modules in a line-up
After the Cabinet Modules are selected, they need to be
arranged in a line-up, normally in a straight line next to each
other. Such a line-up can be mounted against a wall (Cabinet
Modules require front access only). Custom configurations
(such as back-to-back) can also be offered. DC bus connections for back-to-back arrangements can be made at the end of a line-up or in the middle, in some instances without requiring any additional cabinet.
Various issues need to be considered when determining the
layout of the line-up:
n
A Line Module is always positioned adjacent to and on the right hand side of its associated single Line Connection Module (when looking at the front of the lineup). Line Connection Modules for parallel connection have the
associated Line Modules on either side.
n Line Modules are often positioned towards the center of the line-up. This provides for half the total DC bus power
to be fed in each direction (and therefore half the DC bus cross-section), in contrast to the DC bus having to carry full current if the Line Module is at one end of a line-up.
n
The largest Motor Modules should preferably be closest
to the Line Module. This may allow the DC bus size to
be reduced further down the line-up where less power
is required.
n Motor Modules that feed pairs of motors where one is motoring while the other is regenerating (e.g.
winders/unwinders or some test stands) should preferably be positioned adjacent to each other, to minimize the DC bus current elsewhere in the line-up.
n
Braking Modules should be positioned as close as possible to the motor module(s) regenerating the most power.
n
For process, plant layout or cabling design reasons, there may be a preference to position certain drives in a sequence, or at least adjacent to each other in groups.
Such preferences may need to be balanced against the
considerations listed above, in order to obtain the best
technical and most cost effective solution.
The positioning of Cabinet Modules in a line-up is therefore
often an iterative process.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
2/5
2
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
System configuration guidelines
2
Specifying the DC bus for each Cabinet Module
Cabinet Module options applicable to a whole line-up
Once the arrangement of Cabinet Modules is known, and with a thorough understanding of the DC current demand
(motoring or generating) of the various Motor Modules
based on the process to be controlled, the required DC bus
current rating can be determined for each cabinet module.
n
The DC bus rating is a mandatory option for all Line and
Motor Modules.
n
For Line Connection and Auxiliary Power Supply Modules a DC bus is optional. If these modules are positioned at the end of a line-up they may not need a DC bus. However, if there are Motor and/or Line Modules to either side, then a DC bus may be needed.
n
The DC bus is available in different widths (60, 80 or 100 mm) and dependant on current rating with either a single busbar per pole, or two or three busbars in parallel.
- Only busbars of the same width can be interconnected. Therefore all DC bus in a line-up must be of the same width.
- For reduced DC bus current ratings along a line-up, it is possible to change from say three parallel busbars down to two, and then down to a single one.
n
For the interconnection of the DC bus from one cabinet (or section of a line-up) to an adjacent one, standard bus
transition pieces are provided. These are permanently
mounted. During installation the transition pieces slide
into the next bus section and only need to be tightened.
With each Cabinet Module being specified individually, it is
necessary to ensure that they are all compatible and can be
combined in one line-up. Examples of options applicable to all modules in a line up include:
n
Enclosure type (NEMA 1, NEMA 1 filtered, NEMA 12).
n
Cabinet base (plinth): All Cabinet Modules must have the
same overall height.
n
UL or cUL listing – the complete line-up is either UL listed per UL 508A or not. It is not possible to have only some of the Cabinet Modules UL listed, but others not.
n
Documentation format and languages should be the same for all modules. Documentation options can be specified
for each Cabinet Module individually, or for the line-up as a whole (refer to following paragraph).
Combining Cabinet Modules into transport sections
Each Cabinet Module is specified individually. It is possible for each Cabinet Module to also be shipped individually, each
one on its own pallet, each with its own piece of DC bus as
specified per the option codes.
n
It is important to note that even if Cabinet Modules are
shipped individually, they need to be installed in the
arrangement as per the specified line-up design. This is
especially the case if the DC bus rating varies along the
line-up. But there are usually also other components (such as DRIVE-CLiQ cables) that were selected based on a specific configuration.
It is, however, more common to combine Cabinet Modules
into transport sections:
n Two or more Cabinet Modules are bolted together on a
common pallet, and are fitted with a common transport
beam. The maximum width of each transport section is
2,400 mm (approx. 8 ft). Transport sections are specified by option Y11, with a code to specify the position of a Cabinet Module within the line-up.
n
Normally, the DC bus for each transport section is
provided as a solid bus running its entire length.
- This minimizes the number of bolted connections,
simplifying installation and maintenance.
- A consequence of this is that it is not possible to change the position of individual Cabinet Modules within a
line-up at a later stage.
n
Auxiliary power connections between cabinets in one
transport section are automatically done in the factory.
2/6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Documentation and Integration Engineering
Included with each individual Cabinet Module is a set of
drawings and documentation (in electronic format (pdf),
shipped on a CD with the Cabinet Module). As a default
there is, however, no documentation for the complete line-up
showing interconnections between Cabinet Modules. The
reason is that the factory cannot deduce how the various
Cabinet Modules are intended to function, based on the
individual part numbers. For example, there may be a number
of Motor Modules with only some including a control unit,
which could be connected in many different ways. One control unit could be used to control a number of power
modules, each for a different motor or some power modules
could be intended for parallel connection. And there is no
way to tell which control unit is to be connected to which
power module(s).
“Integration Engineering” to integrate the individual Cabinet
Modules into one functioning line-up can be provided,
based on a detailed customer specification. This includes:
n
Documentation for the line-up as a whole, with all internal interconnections required for a functioning system.
n
Provision of all the interconnections such as DRIVE-CLiQ cables and other wiring to achieve the specified functionality.
Integration Engineering can be ordered using separate part
numbers. Documentation option codes (dxf format,
advance (submittal) copies etc.) can be added to the order
no. for integration engineering for the line-up as a whole,
instead of being added to the order no. for each individual
Cabinet Module.
Note that in this context “Integration Engineering” is limited
only to integrating individual Cabinet Modules into a line-up.
This is not to be confused with integration of the drive lineup
into the customer’s plant and interconnection to external
equipment such as power supplies, motors and process
control or automation equipment, which is outside the
scope of supply of a Cabinet Module line-up!
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
System overview
System design considerations
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules have been designed to
offer the highest possible level of operational reliability.
n
EMC measures have been rigorously implemented to
ensure trouble free operation of high speed digital
control and communication systems in close proximity
to high power switching devices.
n
With the help of air flow and temperature simulations,
partitions have been designed to act as air baffles and
heat sinks.
n
Special measures used in the construction of the cabinets ensure that they remain mechanically durable over their entire life cycle.
n
Attention has been paid to providing a wide range of
cable routing options and special design concepts are
applied consistently to broaden the scope of application
and simplify servicing.
n
The units are supplied complete with all the necessary
connections and connecting elements. Thanks to their
carefully considered configuration concept, cabinets are
shipped in a ready-to-connect state or, in the case of
multiple transport sections, have been prepared for
quick assembly.
The selection you make is supported by an extensive range of
options, harmonized and coordinated to various applications.
The design of replaceable components is based on the
principle that they must be quick and easy to change. In addition, the “Spares-On-Web” Internet tool makes it easy to
view the spare parts that are available for the particular order.
All components, from individual parts to the ready-to-connect
cabinet, undergo rigorous testing throughout the entire production process. This guarantees a high level of functional
reliability during installation and commissioning, as well as operation.
Benefits
The outstanding system features of the SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Modules provide the following advantages:
n
Pre-designed, type tested system:
- Configuration of standard catalog product
minimizes engineering.
- Type tested, robust design provides guaranteed
performance in industrial environments.
n
High level of reliability and availability:
- Power modules with high ratings minimize component count and maximize reliability.
- Individual modules and power components can be
replaced quickly and easily, which ensures a higher level of plant availability.
n Process optimization with minimal effort:
- A standard PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface and various analog and digital interfaces enable easy integration into automation solutions.
- Vector control fulfills the most exacting requirements regarding the accuracy and dynamic response of drives.
n
Energy savings during operation:
- The inverters on the motor side are coupled through a common DC bus which allows energy exchange between motors that are motoring and generating. In this way, energy is saved, the line infeed is relieved and line harmonics reduced.
- Generally the line infeed is only dimensioned for the
maximum energy or the maximum current drawn when motoring – and not the sum of the energy ratings of all Motor Modules connected to the DC bus.
- As a consequence, for example, for winders/unwinders
or transmission test stands with Motor Modules that are motoring and generating, a significantly smaller line infeed unit can be selected.
n
Cost minimization during operation, maintenance,
and service:
- Simple commissioning with the menu-driven STARTER commissioning tool.
- Optional, menu-navigated AOP30 advanced operator panel with plain text display and bar-type display of process values.
- All components are easily accessible, which makes them extremely service friendly.
n
Space-saving design
- Optimized component layouts result in smallest
possible footprint.
n
Environmentally friendly operation:
- The drives are exceptionally quiet and compact due to the use of state-of-the-art IGBT power semiconductors and an innovative cooling concept that ensures a
long lifetime.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
2/7
2
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Notes
System overview
2
2/8
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
5
Line Modules
3/2 Overview of Line Modules
Line Connection Modules
Basic Line Modules
Smart Line Modules
Active Line Modules
3/3
Line Connection Modules
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
3/13
Basic Line Modules
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
3/21
Smart Line Modules
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
3/29
Active Line Modules with
Active Interface Modules
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Module Overview
Overview of Line Modules
3
Line Modules are the link between the 3-phase supply system
and the common DC bus, and comprise:
n Line Connection Module: The Line Connection Module contains the disconnect device and short circuit protection (a circuit breaker plus fuses as required for SCCR), and when required additional components such as, for
example, a contactor, line reactor and optionally AC and DC control power supplies. The Line Connection Module feeds 3-phase power to the line side converter – the Basic, Smart or Active Line Module.
n Basic Line Module: A Basic Line Module is a basic diode
(or thyristor) 6-pulse bridge rectifier that rectifies the incoming AC power to feed the DC bus. A Basic Line
Module is non-regenerative, meaning the power flow is always from the line supply system to the DC bus, it cannot feed power from the DC bus back into the line.
Up to four Basic Line Modules can be connected in parallel, or configured to provide 12-, 18- or 24-pulse rectifiers in combination with a phase shifting drive isolation transformer.
n Smart Line Module: A Smart Line Module is a fully
regenerative IGBT bridge that is capable of feeding power in both directions, from the line to the DC bus, or from the DC bus back to the line, at 100% of its rated current. Unlike older designs using thyristor bridges to feed power back to the line, the Smart Line Module does not require an
autotransformer and there is no danger of inverter failure – the IGBTs will safely turn off in the event of a power failure during regeneration without damage or blowing any fuses.
Up to four Smart Line Modules can be connected in
parallel, or configured to provide 12-, 18- or 24-pulse rectifiers in combination with a phase shifting drive
isolation transformer.
For line-ups requiring only a small amount of regeneration compared to the power drawn from the supply for
motoring, it is also possible to have a mix of Basic Line Modules and Smart Line Modules feeding a DC bus. This requires some engineering to ensure that each unit will carry the correct amount of current (please consult factory).
n
Active Line Module: An Active Line Module is also a fully
regenerative IGBT bridge that is capable of feeding power in both directions, but offers a number of unique features over and above a Smart Line Module. This includes very low harmonics (clean power), unity or adjustable power factor, and a controlled DC bus voltage that is held stable even with fluctuations in the supply voltage which provides a
number of benefits explained elsewhere (refer to section on Active Line Modules). In the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module system, an Active Line Module is always supplied as a unit together with its Active Interface Module, which includes the clean power filter and pre-charge circuitry.
Common DC Bus
DC
power
Line
Connection
Module
Basic, or Smart
Active Line
Module
AC line supply
Basic power flow in a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up
3/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
AC to motor
Motor
Module
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Line Connection Modules – Overview
In some designs with motorized circuit breaker the DC bus
must be precharged before the main circuit breaker can be
closed. Interlocking circuitry for start-up sequencing is
included. The circuit breaker should never be closed directly
by bypassing the interlocks.
Line Connection Module with option L43 for Basic
Line Module
For Basic Line Modules, the Line Connection Module includes
a line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient impedance on
the line side (for example, when using a dedicated drive isolation transformer) the line reactor can be excluded (option L22). This option is not available for parallel Basic
Line Modules connected to a single Line Connection Module,
as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing.
- Q1
M
- L1
U1
L1
The Line Connection Module contains the disconnect
device and short circuit protection (a circuit breaker plus
fuses as required for SCCR), and when required additional
components such as, for example, a contactor, line reactor
and optionally AC and DC control power supplies. The Line
Connection Module feeds 3-phase power to the line side
converter – the Basic, Smart or Active Line Module.
Line Connection Modules are available for the following
voltages and currents:
Line voltage
Rated input current
380 … 480 V 3 ph.
AC 250 … 3,000 A
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph.
AC 280 … 3,000 A
Design
Different versions exist depending on the rated input current:
•Units ≤ 800 A include a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
•Units > 800 A include a fixed mounted insulated case circuit
breaker (motorized power circuit breaker). Optionally, a draw-out circuit breaker can be supplied.
All Line Connection Modules additionally include
semiconductor fuses as required for the high SCCR rating of power modules.
When Line Connection Modules are ordered, the type of Line
Module used must be specified:
•for Basic Line Module: Option L43
•
for Smart Line Module: Option L44
•
for Active Line Module: Option L42
L2
V1
L3
W1
Example of a Line Connection Module for a Basic Line Module
For most Basic Line Module ratings, the precharge function is
included within the Basic Line Module itself. For the largest
(1880 A DC) Basic Line Module, the precharge circuitry is
provided in the Line Connection Module.
An input isolation contactor is available for Line Connection
Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB), by specifying option L13.
Line Connection Module with option L44 for Smart
Line Module
For Smart Line Modules, the Line Connection Module always
includes the power supply for the precharge circuit. For Line
Connection Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB) an input contactor
is standard, to bridge (bypass) the precharge circuit after the
DC bus is charged. For Line Connector Modules >800 A, the
motorized circuit breaker is used for this function.
When provided, the line reactor is always included in the
Smart Line Module cabinet.
- Q1
M
L1
U1
L2
V1
L3
W1
Example of a Line Connection Module for a Smart Line Module
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/3
3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
3
Design (continued)
Selection and ordering data
Line Connection Module with option L42 for Active
Line Module
Line Connection Module
For Active Line Modules, the Line Connection Module
connects to the Active Interface Module. For the smaller Active Interface Module (frame sizes FI/FX and GI/GX), the Active Interface Module includes the precharge circuitry and the associated precharge and bridging contactors. For larger sizes the Line Connection Module
includes the power supply for the precharge circuit. For Line Connection Modules ≤ 800 A (with MCCB), an input contactor is standard, to bridge the precharge circuit. For
Line Connection Modules >800 A, the motorized circuit
breaker is used for this function.
- Q10
K4_2_1
K4_4_1
K4_6_1
- Q1
- K1
U1
L1
L2
V1
L3
W1
Example of a Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules
<800A
- Q10
K4_2_1
K4_4_1
K4_6_1
K4_2_2
- Q1
M
L1
K4_4_2
K4_6_2
U1_1
L2
V1_1
L3
W1_1
U1_2
V1_2
Rated
input
current
SCCR
standard*
A
kA
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3
65
250
6SL3700-0LE34-0AU3
65
380
6SL3700-0LE36-3AU3
65
600
6SL3700-0LE38-0AU3
65
770
6SL3700-0LE41-0AU3
65
1000
6SL3700-0LE41-3AU3
65
1250
6SL3700-0LE41-6AU3
65
1600
6SL3700-0LE42-0AU3
65
2000
6SL3700-0LE42-0BU3
65
2000
6SL3700-0LE42-5BU3
100
2500
6SL3700-0LE43-2BU3
100
3000
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
25
6SL3700-0LG32-8AU3
280
6SL3700-0LG34-0AU3
25
380
6SL3700-0LG36-3AU3
25
600
35
6SL3700-0LG38-0AU3
770
85
6SL3700-0LG41-0AU3
1000
85
6SL3700-0LG41-3AU3
1250
85
6SL3700-0LG41-6AU3
1600
6SL3700-0LG42-0BU3
85
2000
6SL3700-0LG42-5BU3
85
2500
6SL3700-0LG43-2BU3
85
3000
SCCR
high*
(option L70)
kA
—
—
—
—
84
84
100
100
84
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
100
100
100
100
100
Short circuit current ratings (SCCR) provided above are per
UL508A supplement SB for Line Connection Modules in combination with Line Modules as listed in the table on the
following page. The standard SCCR applies to the base part
number. For Line Connection Modules rated 1,000 A and up,
a high SCCR is optionally available by specifying option code L70.
W1_2
Example of a Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules in
parallel connection
Order numbers and option codes
When ordering a drive with options, add -Z to the order
number followed by option codes separated by a “+” sign.
Example: 6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3-Z L43+M90+…
• SINAMICS S120 CM is a standard product, defined by its order no. and option codes.
• ”Y” options (+Y..) require additional text to describe the
option. For example:
Y09 Special enclosure color RAL 1018 (traffic yellow)
3/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
* Note: The SCCR of the line-up is additionally dependent on the SCCR of the smallest Motor Module it contains. The maximum value of the SCCR is determined by the power rating of any Motor Modules as follows.
Motor Module(s) <600 HP:
Maximum SCCR 65 kA
Motor Module(s) <900 HP:
Maximum SCCR 84 kA
When ordering a Line Connection Module it is essential to
specify the option code for the type of Line Module that it is
connected to, to ensure that it is correctly configured for its
intended use. This applies particularly to interconnecting
busbars, and power supplies for precharge circuits.
• Option L43 for a Basic Line Module
• Option L44 for a Smart Line Module
• Option L42 for an Active Line Module
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Assignment of Line Modules to Line Connection Modules
The table below shows the assignment of Basic, Smart or Active Line Modules to Line Connection Modules. These are the
only available combinations. These combinations were evaluated by UL, and components are selected in compliance with
the requirements of the National Electrical Code NFPA70.
Line Connection Module
Basic Line Module
Rated
Rated
input
input
current
Current
A
A
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
250
6SL3700-0LE32-5AU3
–
380
6SL3700-0LE34-0AU3
–
600
6SL3700-0LE36-3AU3
365
460
770
6SL3700-0LE38-0AU3
710
1000 6SL3700-0LE41-0AU3
–
1250 6SL3700-0LE41-3AU3
1010
1600 6SL3700-0LE41-6AU3
1265
Active Line Module
Rated
input
current
A
Rated
input
current
A
3
–
–
463
–
614
883
1093
1430
–
–
6SL3730-6TE35-5AU3
–
6SL3730-6TE37-3AU3
6SL3730-6TE41-1AU3
6SL3730-6TE41-3AU3
6SL3730-6TE41-7AU3
210
260
380
490
605
840
985
1405
6SL3730-7TE32-1AU3
6SL3730-7TE32-6AU3
6SL3730-7TE33-8AU3
6SL3730-7TE35-0AU3
6SL3730-7TE36-1AU3
6SL3730-7TE38-4AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-2CU3
2500 6SL3700-0LE42-5BU3
2 × 1170 6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-5CU3
3000 6SL3700-0LE43-2BU3 2 × 1500 6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-8CU3
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
280
6SL3700-0LG32-8AU3 260
6SL3730-1TG33-0AU3
380
6SL3700-0LG34-0AU3 375
6SL3730-1TG34-3AU3
600
6SL3700-0LG36-3AU3 575
6SL3730-1TG36-8AU3
770
6SL3700-0LG38-0AU3 –
–
1000 6SL3700-0LG41-0AU3 925
6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3
1250 6SL3700-0LG41-3AU3 1180
6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3
–
2 × 817
–
6SL3730-6TE41-1BU3
6SL3730-6TE41-1CU3
6SL3730-6TE41-3BU3
6SL3730-6TE41-3CU3
6SL3730-6TE41-7BU3
6SL3730-6TE41-7CU3
–
2 × 936
–
6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-0CU3
–
2 × 1335 6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-4CU3
–
–
463
757
–
1009
–
–
6SL3730-6TG35-5AU3
6SL3730-6TG38-8AU3
–
6SL3730-6TG41-2AU3
–
–
575
735
–
1025
1600
2000
1430
2 × 700
6SL3730-6TG41-7AU3
6SL3730-6TG38-8BU3
6SL3730-6TG38-8CU3
6SL3730-6TG41-2BU3
6SL3730-6TG41-2CU3
–
1270
2 × 698
2000
2000
6SL3700-0LE42-0AU3
6SL3700-0LE42-0BU3
6SL3700-0LG41-6AU3
6SL3700-0LG42-0BU3
1630
2 × 935
1580
2 × 855
–
2500
6SL3700-0LG42-5BU3
3000
6SL3700-0LG43-2BU3
–
–
6SL3730-1TE34-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE35-3AU3
6SL3730-1TE38-2AU3
–
6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3
Smart Line Module
2 × 1092
6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3
6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3
6SL3730-1TG41-1CU3
–
6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3
6SL3730-1TG41-4CU3
2 × 1462 6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3
6SL3730-1TG41-8CU3
2 × 1011
2 × 1323
2 × 934
–
2 × 1323
6SL3730-6TG41-7BU3
6SL3730-6TG41-7CU3
–
–
–
6SL3730-7TG35-8AU3
6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3
–
6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3
6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3
6SL3730-7TG37-4CU3
2 × 974 6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TG41-0CU3
2 × 1206 6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3
6SL3730-7TG41-3CU3
–
–
Entries
in italics: Parallel connection of two Line Modules with a single Line Connection Module:
The current derating factors as listed below are already included in the current values listed above:
• 7.5% for Basic Line Modules
• 7.5% for Smart Line Modules
• 5% for Active Line Modules
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
Line Current
• Rated current INE
3
Current Demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC
(Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2)
- Making current
- Holding current
Power loss, max. 3)
at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM
Cooling air requirement
(L43 BLM) 1)
Sound pressure level LpA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1)
Line supply connection L1, L2, L3
• Conductor size, max.
Ground (PE) connection
• Conductor size, max.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
In combination with Line module
• Standard
• High (option L70)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width
• Height 4)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM lb [kg]
Frame size
Line Connection Module
6SL37006SL37000LE32-5AU3 0LE34-0AU3
6SL37000LE36-3AU3
6SL37000LE38-0AU3
6SL37000LE41-0AU3
6SL37000LE41-3AU3
A
250
380
600
770
1,000
1,250
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.07
–
1.07
A
A
3.6
0.04
3.6
0.04
3.6
0.04
10.8
0.12
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
kW
0.115 [0.115] 0.19 [0.19]
kW
–
–
cfm [m3/s] –
–
0.31 [0.31]
0.39 [0.39]
0.675 [0.675] 0.74 [0.74]
–
–
0.18 [0.18]
–
763 [0.36]
0.29 [0.29]
0.787 [0.787]
763 [0.36]
dB(A)
–
–
–
–
70 [68]
70 [68]
2x250 MCM
2x250 MCM
2x600 MCM
3x500 MCM
8x 500 MCM
8x 500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
65
–
IP20
65
–
IP20
65
–
IP20
65
–
IP20
65
84
IP20
65
84
IP20
inch [mm] 24 [600]
inch [mm] 87 [2,200]
inch [mm] 24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
460 [210]
–
FL
510 [230]
–
FL
680 [310]
790 [360]
GL
750 [340]
930 [420]
HL
990 [450]
–
JL
1,040 [470]
1,260 [570]
JL
kA
kA
lb [kg]
lb [kg]
1) With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only.
2)Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
(IP54) enclosure.
3/6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
12 ventilated
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
Line Current
• Rated current I N E
Current Demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2)
- Making current
- Holding current
Power loss, max. 3)
at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM
Cooling air requirement
(L43 BLM) 1)
Sound pressure level LpA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1)
Line supply connection L1, L2, L3
• Conductor size, max.
Line Connection Module
6SL3700-
6SL37000LE41-6AU3
0LE42-0AU3
A
1,600
2,000
2,000
2,500
3,000
A
A
–
1.07
–
2.14
–
2.14
–
2.14
–
2.14
A
A
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
kW
kW
cfm [m3/s]
0.41 [0.41]
1.186 [1.186]
763 [0.36]
0.60 [0.60]
1.366 [1.366]
1,526 [0.72]
0.60 [0.60]
1.594 [1.594]
1,526 [0.72]
0.95 [0.95]
2.502 [2,502]
1,526 [0.72]
0.95 [0.95]
2.482[2,482]
1,526 [0.72]
dB(A)
70 [68]
72 [70]
72 [70]
72 [70]
72 [70]
10x 500 MCM
10x 500 MCM
10x 500 MCM
10x 500 MCM
10x 600 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
kA
kA
65
100
IP20
65
100
IP20
65
84
IP20
100
–
IP20
100
–
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
lb [kg]
lb [kg]
1,040 [470]
1,480 [670]
JL
1,080 [490]
1,500 [680]
JL
1,360 [600]
2,160 [980]
KL
1,370 [620]
2,200 [1,000]
KL
1,590 [720]
2,380 [1,080]
LL
Ground (PE) connection
• Conductor size, max.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
In combination with Line module
• Standard
• High (option L70)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width
• Height 4)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM lb [kg]
Frame size
6SL37006SL37006SL37000LE42-0BU3
0LE42-5BU3
0LE43-2BU3
For parallel connected line modules
3
With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only.
Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100% utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/7
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Technical data
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Line Current
• Rated current I NE
3
Current Demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2)
- Making current
- Holding current
Power loss, max. 3)
at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM
Cooling air requirement
(L43 BLM) 1)
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1)
Line supply connection L1, L2, L3
• Conductor size, max.
Ground (PE) connection
• Conductor size, max.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
In combination with Line module
• Standard
• High (option L70)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width
• Height 4)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM
Frame size
Line Connection Module
6SL37006SL37000LG32-8AU3
0LG34-0AU3
6SL37000LG36-3AU3
6SL37000LG38-0AU3
6SL37000LG41-0AU3
A
280
380
600
770
1,000
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.07
A
A
3.6
0.04
3.6
0.04
3.6
0.04
10.8
0.20
0.5
0.06
kW
0.125 [0.125]
kW
0.402 [0.402]
cfm [m3/s] –
0.19 [0.19]
0.668 [0.668]
–
0.31 [0.31]
0.794 [0.794]
–
0.39 [0.39]
–
–
0.18 [0.18]
0.963 [0.963]
763 [0.36]
dB(A)
–
–
–
–
70 [68]
2X 250 MCM
2X 250 MCM
2x 600 MCM
3x 500 MCM
8x 500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
25
–
IP20
25
–
IP20
25
–
IP20
35
–
IP20
85
100
IP20
inch [mm] 24 [600]
inch [mm] 87 [2,200]
inch [mm] 24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
lb [kg]
lb [kg]
510 [230]
680 [310]
FL
680 [310]
880 [400]
GL
750 [340]
–
HL
990 [450]
1,430 [650]
JL
kA
kA
490 [220]
570 [260]
FL
With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only.
Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
1)
2)
3)
4)
3/8
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Technical data
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Line Current
• Rated current I N E
Current Demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 230 V 2 ph. AC • 230 V 2 ph. AC (Opt. L43 BLM)1) 2)
- Making current
- Holding current
Power loss, max. 3)
at 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM
Cooling air requirement
(L43 BLM) 1)
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz (Option L43 BLM) 1)
Line supply connection L1, L2, L3
• Conductor size, max.
Ground (PE) connection
• Conductor size, max.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
In combination with Line module
• Standard
• High (option L70)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width
• Height 4)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
- Option L42 ALM / L44 SLM
- Option L43 BLM lb [kg]
Frame size
Line Connection Module
6SL37006SL37000LG41-3AU3
0LG41-6AU3
6SL37006SL37006SL37000LG42-0BU3
0LG42-5BU3
0LG43-2BU3
For parallel connected line modules
A
1,250
1,600
2,000
2,500
3,000
A
A
–
1.07
–
1.07
–
2.14
–
2.14
–
2.14
A
A
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.5
0.06
0.41 [0.41]
1.387 [1.387]
763 [0.36]
0.60 [0.60]
2.166 [2.166]
1,526 [0.72]
0.95 [0.95]
2.166 [2.166]
1,526 [0.72]
0.95 [0.95]
2.894 [2.894]
1,526 [0.72]
70 [68]
70 [68]
72 [70]
72 [70]
72 [70]
8x 500 MCM
8x 500 MCM
10x 500 MCM
10x 500 MCM
10x 600 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
500 MCM
kA
kA
85
100
IP20
85
100
IP20
85
100
IP20
85
100
IP20
85
100
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
lb [kg]
1,040 [470]
1,480 [670]
JL
1,080 [490]
1,500 [680]
JL
1,320 [600]
2,160 [980]
KL
1,370 [620]
2,200 [1,000]
KL
1,590 [720]
2,380 [1,080]
LL
kW
0.29 [0.29]
kW
1.073[1.073]
cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36]
dB(A)
3
With option L43 (for Basic Line Module) only.
Current demand of contactors/circuit breakers and fans with NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43, or NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/9
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Options
The table below lists the available options for Line Connection Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details).
Option
code ≤ 800A
Available Options
3
TM150 Terminal Module for temperature monitoring (qty. 1) G51
TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 2) G52
TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 3) G53
TM150 Terminal Modules for temperature monitoring (qty. 4) G54
Power supply for blowers, mounted in Line Connection Module
K70
Auxiliary power supplies, mounted in Line Connection Module
K76
Input contactor (only for ≤ 800A)
L13
Without input line reactor (only for L43 Basic Line Module)
L22
Surge Protection for ungrounded (IT) power supply
L21
Draw-out circuit breaker
L25
Current transformer upstream of circuit breaker
L41
Line Connection Module for Active Line Modules
L42
Line Connection Module for Basic Line Modules
L43
Line Connection Module for Smart Line Modules
L44
EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door
L45
Enclosure space heater
L55
High SCCR (short circuit current rating) 84 or 100 kA
L70
Insulation Monitor for ungrounded supplies
L87
Base (plinth) 100mm
M06
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
M07
M21
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23)
[includes M60]
M23
M27
Side panel (left)
Enclosure IP43
[includes M60]
M43
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54)
[includes M60]
M54
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor)
Additional touch protection
[included in M23, M43 and M54]
M59
M60
EMC shield busbar
M70
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
M80
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
M81
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
M82
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
M83
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
M84
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
M85
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
M86
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
M87
Lifting beam/eye bolts
M90
P10
Input power meter
[includes L41]
Input power meter with PROFIBUS
[includes L41]
P11
UL listing per UL508A
[requires M23, M43 or M54]
U90
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
Special enclosure paint color
[requires M23, M43 or M54
plus T58]
[specify color]
Assembly into transport sections
[specify sections]
Y11
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm
[specify text]
Y31
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm
[specify text]
Y32
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm
[specify text]
Y33
3/10
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
U91
Y09
Rated
current
800…2,000A ≥ 2,000 A
–
–
–
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Options
Option
code
D02
Available Options (continued)
Customer drawings in DXF format
Advance copy of customer documentation in PDF format
D14
Documentation English/French
D58
Nameplate English/French
T58
Visual Inspection by customer
F03
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
F71
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test
F77
Customer specific test (on request)
F97
≤ 800A
Rated current
800…2,000A ≥ 2,000 A
3
Option combination matrix for Line Connection Modules
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available
as standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
Electrical Options
K70
K70
K76
K76
L13
L22
L25
L41
L42
L43
L44
P10
P11
–
–
–
–
L13
–
L22
–
L25
–
–
L41
L42
–
–
L43
–
L44
–
–
P10
–
P11
–
–
–
–
Mechanical Options
M06
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M43
M54
M59
M60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M90
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
–
M21
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
M90
–
Y11
–
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/11
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Line Connection Modules
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y32
–
Y31
Y33
–
Y32
–
–
Y33
–
3/12
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Overview
Basic Line Modules are available for the following voltages
and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting
up to four identical Basic Line Modules in parallel.
Line voltage
Rated power
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
200 … 1,000 kW
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
200 (250) … 1,250 (1,500) kW
A Basic Line Module is a 6-pulse rectifier bridge. For low
harmonic feedback it is possible to configure multiple Basic
Line Modules in 12-, 18- or 24-pulse configurations in
combination with phase shifting transformers. Alternatively,
line harmonics filters are available to reduce harmonics.
Basic Line Modules are compact line infeeds that supply
power from the AC supply to the DC bus – power regeneration
from the DC bus back to the line is not possible. They are used when energy does not need to be fed back into the supply network.
For Basic Line Modules, the Line Connection Module includes
a line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient impedance on
the line side (for example, when using a dedicated drive
isolation transformer) the line reactor can be excluded
(option L22). This option is not available for parallel Basic Line
Modules connected to a single Line Connection Module, as
line reactors are required to ensure current sharing.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
If any of the loads in the line-up regenerate more power than can be absorbed by other loads, braking modules with
resistors are required to convert the excess energy into heat.
Design
Basic Line Modules are available in different frame sizes.
With frame sizes FB and GB, a fully controlled thyristor bridge
is used to pre-charge the DC bus (Basic Line Modules and connected Motor Modules). During operation, the thyristors
are fired with a trigger delay angle of 0°.
Parallel connection of Basic Line Modules to increase
the power rating
Basic Line Modules, frame size GD for 900 kW (480 V) or
1,300 kW (600 V) use a diode bridge, and the DC bus is
precharged via a separate line side precharge circuit located
in the Line Connection Module (option L43, Line Connection
Module for Basic Line Module).
Two Basic Line Modules supplied with power via two
separate Line Connection Modules
With this arrangement, each Basic Line Module is supplied
by a Line Connection Module, each of which includes a
circuit breaker disconnect and fuses. Basic Line Modules
with their associated Line Connection Modules may be
located anywhere in the line-up.
There are two alternative arrangements for connecting Line
Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with a higher
power rating.
Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock
out/tag out procedures may be required on site.
Common
DC Bus
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Line
Connection
Module
Basic
Line
Module
Motor
Module
6SL37301T...-.AU3
AC to motor
AC Line Supply
Line
Connection
Module
Basic
Line
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
External
Braking
Resistor
6SL37301T...-.AU3
AC to motor
AC Line Supply
Braking
Module
AC to motor
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/13
3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Design
Two Basic Line Modules supplied with power via a single
Line Connection Module
In the alternative arrangement, two Basic Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line Connection Module, which results in a very compact design
for the line infeed. The power connections on the Basic Line
Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a
mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right. The
Basic Line Module to the left has an order no. ending in CU3,
example: 6SL3730-1T…-.CU3.
The Line Connection Module for parallel connection includes
a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses, for
selective individual protection of each line module.
3
Common
DC Bus
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Basic
Line
Module
Line
Connection
Module
6SL37301T...-.CU3
1T...
AC to motor AC to motor
Basic
Line
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
External
Braking
Resistor
6SL37301T...-.AU3
AC line supply
Note:
Please note that only Basic Line Modules with exactly the
same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the
possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the
Basic Line Modules must be derated by 7.5%.
Braking
Module
AC to motor
Basic Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on a
common control unit, the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables need
to be considered.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Selection and ordering guide
Rated power
at 460 (400) V
Note for parallel
connection
Mounting relative
to Line Connection
Module
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC)
250 (200)
–
300 (250)
–
–
450 (400)
630 (560)
–
Left
800 (710)
–
Left
1,000 (900)
–
Left
kW
3/14
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Basic Line Module
Rated power
at 575 (690) V
Order No.
kW
6SL3730-1TE34-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE35-3AU3
6SL3730-1TE38-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-2AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-2CU3
6SL3730-1TE41-5AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-5CU3
6SL3730-1TE41-8AU3
6SL3730-1TE41-8CU3
Note for parallel
connection
Basic Line Module
Mounting relative
Order No.
to Line Connection
Module
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC)
6SL3730-1TG33-0AU3
200 (250)
–
6SL3730-1TG34-3AU3
–
300 (355)
6SL3730-1TG36-8AU3
450 (560)
–
6SL3730-1TG41-1AU3
750 (900)
–
6SL3730-1TG41-1CU3
Left
6SL3730-1TG41-4AU3
900 (1,100)
–
6SL3730-1TG41-4CU3
Left
6SL3730-1TG41-8AU3
1,200 (1,500)
–
6SL3730-1TG41-8CU3
Left
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Block diagram
Cabinet Module
DC busbar
Cabinet Module
Supply
infeed
L1
L2
L3
Connection to next
auxiliary power supply
=
=
Internal
power supply
Activation of bypass
contactor
+Temp
-Temp
EP +24 V
EP M 1
U1 -X1
V1
W1
PE
-X42
1
2
3
4
3
~
-F10
-F11
P24L
P24L
M
M
DCPA
DCNA
DCP
DCN
=
DC fuses
Option N52
internal
Fan
READY
DC LINK
POWER OK
IPD Card
G_D213_EN_00057c
-X41
4
3
2
1
P24 V
M
LEDs
Line Connection
Module
(Option L43)
-X9
1
2
3
4
5
6
X402
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
Basic Line
Module
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
X400 X401
Connection example of a Basic Line Module
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/15
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Technical data
Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
3
6SL37301TE34-2AU3
6SL37301TE35-3AU3
6SL37301TE38-2AU3
6SL37301TE41-2AU3
6SL37301TE41-2CU3
6SL37301TE41-5AU3
6SL37301TE41-5CU3
6SL37301TE41-8AU3
6SL37301TE41-8CU3
250
200
200
160
300
250
250
200
450
400
355
315
630
560
500
450
800
710
630
560
1,000
900
800
705
420
530
820
1,200
1,500
1,880
328
413
640
936
1,170
1,467
630
795
1,230
1,800
2,250
2,820
A
A
365
460
710
1,010
1,265
1,630
547
690
1,065
1,515
1,897
2,380
A
A
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
7,200
9,600
14,600
23,200
29,000
34,800
57,600
76,800
116,800
185,600
232,000
139,200
1.9 [1.9]
kW
cfm [m3/s] 360 [0.17]
2.1 [2.1]
3.2 [3.2]
4.6 [4.6]
5.5 [5.5]
6.9 [6.9]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
dB(A)
68 [66]
68 [66]
68 [66]
73 [71]
73 [71]
73 [71]
ft [m]
ft [m]
8,500 [2,600]
8,500 [2,600]
8,500 [2,600]
13,100 [4,000] 13,100 [4,000] 15,750 [4,800]
12,800 [3,900]
2,800 [3,900]
12,800 [3,900] 19,700 [6,000]
19,700 [6,000] 23,600 [7,200]
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
87[2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
366 [166]
366 [166]
366 [166]
705 [320]
705 [320]
705 [320]
FB
FB
FB
GB
GB
GD
For parallel connection, mounted to the left
of the Line Connection Module
Rated power
kW
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) kW
• For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW
• For I H DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW
DC bus current
A
• Rated current I NDC • Base load current I H DC 1) A
• Maximum current I max DC A
Input current
• Rated current I NE • Maximum current I max E Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max. 3)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level LpA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max. 4)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size
Basic Line Module
F
F
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
IP20
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2) The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.
5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
3/16
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Technical data
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module
Rated power
kW
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW
kW
• For I H DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW
DC bus current
A
• Rated current IN DC • Base load current I H DC 1) A
• Maximum current I max DC A
Input current
• Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E A
A
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply A
• 575 (690) V AC 2) A
DC bus capacitance
F
• Basic Line Module • Drive line-up, max.
F
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 690V] kW
Cooling air requirement
cfm [m3/s]
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
dB(A)
at 60 [50] Hz
Basic Line Module
6SL37301TG33-0AU3
6SL37301TG34-3AU3
6SL37301TG36-8AU3
6SL37301TG41-1AU3
6SL37301TG41-1CU3
6SL37301TG41-4AU3
6SL37301TG41-4CU3
6SL37301TG41-8AU3
6SL37301TG41-8CU3
200
300
450
750
900
1,250
250
355
560
900
1,100
1.500
150
250
355
600
750
1,000
195
280
440
710
910
1,220
300
430
680
1,100
1,400
1,880
234
335
530
858
1,092
1,467
450
645
1,020
1,650
2,100
2,820
260
375
575
925
1,180
1,580
390
563
863
1,388
1,770
2,370
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
3,200
4,800
7,300
11,600
15,470
19,500
25,600
38,400
58,400
92,800
123,760
78,000
3
1.5 [1.5]
2.1 [2.1]
3.0 [3.0]
5.4 [5.4]
5.8 [5.8]
7.3 [7.3]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
68 [66]
68 [66]
68 [66]
73 [71]
73 [71]
73 [71]
4,900 [1,500]
4,900 [1,500]
4,900 [1,500]
7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 9,000 [2,750]
7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 7,400 [2,250] 11,000 [3,375] 11,000 [3,375] 13,500 [4,125]
IP20
IP20
16 [400]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
366 [166]
366 [166]
FB
FB
Output cable length, max. 4)
• Shielded • Unshielded ft [m]
ft [m]
Enclosure (base design)
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
16 [400]
87[2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
366 [166]
705 [320]
705 [320]
705 [320]
FB
GB
GB
GD
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2) The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100% utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request.
5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12
ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/17
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Options
The table below lists the available options for Basic Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details).
Option
code
CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus)
G20 1)
Special enclosure paint color [specify color]
Y09
CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet)
G33 1)
Assembly into transport sections [specify sections]
Y11
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
Y31
Monitoring of precharge function
3
Option
code
Available Options
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the
cabinet door
CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP)
G56
K08 1)
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y32
K90
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y33
Performance expansion for CU320-2
K94 1)
CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET)
K95
Enclosure space heater
L55
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FB)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
L61
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GB/GD)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
L62
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FB)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
L64
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GB/GD)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
L65
Base (plinth) 100mm
M06
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
M07
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
M21
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60]
M23
Side panel (right)
M26
Side panel (left)
M27
Enclosure IP43 [includes M60]
M43
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60]
M54
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet
through floor)
M59
Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43 & M54]
M60
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
M80
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
M81
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
M82
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
M83
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
M84
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
M85
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
M86
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
M87
Lifting beam/eye bolts
M90
UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54]
U90
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
U91
1)
Only in combination with options K90 or K95.
3/18
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Available Options
Customer drawings in dxf format
D02
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
D14
Documentation English/French
D58
Nameplate English/French
T58
Visual Inspection by customer
F03
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
F71
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and
insulation test
F77
Customer specific test (on request)
F97
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Options
Option combination matrix for Basic Line Modules
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available
as standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
Electrical Options
G20
K08
K90
K94
K95
L61
L62
L64
L65
–
–
–
–
–
–
G20
G33
G33
–
K08
–
K90
K94
–
K95
L61
L62
–
L64
–
–
L65
–
–
–
M59
M60
M90
–
Mechanical Options
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M43
M54
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
M06
–
–
M21
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/19
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Basic Line Modules
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y31
Y32
Y33
–
–
Y32
–
Y33
–
–
3/20
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Overview
The use of IGBTs makes Smart Line Modules immune to
inverter commutation faults.
Smart Line Modules are available for the following voltages
and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting
up to four identical SLM in parallel.
Line voltage
Rated power
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
250 … 900 kW
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
400 (450) … 1,150 (1,400) kW
3
A Smart Line Module is a 6-pulse front end. For low
harmonic feedback it is possible to configure multiple Smart
Line Modules in 12-, 18- or 24-pulse configurations in
combination with phase shifting transformers. Note that
commercially available line harmonic filters are not suitable
for use with Smart Line Modules.
Smart Line Modules are uncontrolled rectifiers that supply
power from the AC supply to the DC bus, and that are
also capable of regenerating 100% continuous power from the DC bus back to the line. Regeneration can be
deactivated with a digital input.
For Smart Line Modules the Line Connection Module
includes a 4% line reactor as standard. If there is sufficient
impedance on the line side (for example, when using a
dedicated drive isolation transformer) the line reactor can be
excluded (option L22). This option is not available for parallel
Smart Line Modules connected to a single Line Connection
Module, as line reactors are required to ensure current sharing.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Design
Smart Line Modules are IGBT based inverters. When
regenerating, the IGBTs are switched at the fundamental line frequency. Since this reduces switching losses, a high
percentage of the power device current can be utilized. In
rectifier mode the current flows through the freewheeling
diodes of the IBGTs. The Smart Line Module thus behaves
in a similar way to the Basic Line Module. If any of the loads
in the line-up regenerate more power than can be absorbed
by other loads, the DC bus voltage increases and the IGBTs
are switched to feed the excess energy back into the supply system.
The precharge circuitry is built into Smart Line Modules, and
the Line Connection Module with option L44 (LCM for Smart
Line Module) includes the power supply for the precharge
circuit, as well as a contactor or motorized circuit breaker to
bypass (bridge) the precharge circuit after precharging the
DC bus capacitors.
Braking Modules with associated braking resistors may be
added. They would typically be needed only if it is necessary
to brake the load in the event of a power supply failure.
Parallel connection of Smart Line Modules to increase
the power rating
There are two alternative arrangements for connecting Smart
Line Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with a higher
power rating, similar to the arrangements available for Basic
Line Modules.
Two Smart Line Modules supplied with power via two separate Line Connection Modules
With this arrangement, each Smart Line Module is supplied
by a Line Connection Module, which includes a circuit
breaker disconnect and fuses. The Smart Line Module is
always located to the right of the Line Connection Module,
and has an order no. ending in “AU3”, example: 6SL37306T…-.AU3.
Smart Line Modules with their associated Line Connection
Modules may be located anywhere in the line-up.
Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock
out/tag out procedures may be required on site.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/21
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Design
Two Smart Line Modules supplied with power via a single
Line Connection Module
In the alternative arrangement, two Smart Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line
Connection Module, which results in a very compact design
for the line infeed. The connections on the Smart Line Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right.
For a parallel connection, the Smart Line Module to the right
has an order no. ending in “BU3”, while the one to the left
has an order no. ending in “CU3.”
The Line Connection Module for parallel connection includes
a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses, for selective
individual protection of each line module.
3
Common
DC Bus
Line
Connection
Module
Smart
Line
Module
Smart
Line
Module
Motor
Module
6SL37306T...-.AU3
6SL37306T...-.CU3
AC to motor
AC line supply
Smart
Line
Module
Line
Connection
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
6SL37306T...-.BU3
AC line supply
Note:
Please note that only Smart Line Modules with exactly the
same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the
possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the
Smart Line Modules must be derated by 7.5%.
AC to motor AC to motor
Smart Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on a
common control unit, and the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables
need to be considered.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Selection and ordering data
Rated power at
460 (400) V
Note for parallel
connection
Smart Line Module
Rated power at
575 (690) V
Note for parallel
connection
Smart Line Module
kW
Mounting relative
to Line Connection
Module
Order No.
kW
Mounting relative
to Line Connection
Module
Order No.
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC)
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC)
300 (250)
–
6SL3730-6TE35-5AU3
400 (450)
–
6SL3730-6TG35-5AU3
400 (355)
–
6SL3730-6TE37-3AU3
630 (710)
–
6SL3730-6TG38-8AU3
560 (500)
–
6SL3730-6TE41-1AU3
Right
6SL3730-6TG38-8BU3
Right
6SL3730-6TE41-1BU3
Left
6SL3730-6TG38-8CU3
Left
6SL3730-6TE41-1CU3
–
6SL3730-6TG41-2AU3
–
6SL3730-6TE41-3AU3
Right
6SL3730-6TG41-2BU3
Right
6SL3730-6TE41-3BU3
Left
6SL3730-6TG41-2CU3
Left
6SL3730-6TE41-3CU3
–
6SL3730-6TG41-7AU3
–
6SL3730-6TE41-7AU3
Right
6SL3730-6TG41-7BU3
Right
6SL3730-6TE41-7BU3
Left
6SL3730-6TG41-7CU3
Left
6SL3730-6TE41-7CU3
710 (630)
900 (800)
3/22
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
800 (1,000)
1,200 (1,400)
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Block diagram
Cabinet Module
DC busbar
-X9
1
2
Line Connection
Module
(Option L44)
P24 V
M
3
=
Activation of
bypass contactor
4
M
5
LED
READY
DRIVE-CLiQ socket
Smart
Line
Module
X500
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
Cabinet Module
+Temp
-Temp
EP +24 V
EP M1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
-X41
4
3
2
1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
X400 X401 X402
3
Voltage
Sensing Module
VSM10
=
Internal
power supply
6
7
LEDs
Feedback
pre-charching
8
L1
L2
READY
DC LINK
POWER OK
L3
-F10
Supply
infeed
-X42
1
2
3
4
Line
reactor
L1
L2
L3
U1
V1
W1
PE
-F11
P24L
P24L
M
M
Fan
-F20
DCPA
DCNA
-F21
Fan1)
~
DCP
DCN
=
IPD Card
380 - 480 V 1 ph AC
or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC
-F24
-X100
1 2 3 4 5 6
Auxiliary power supply:
Connection
for Braking
Module
G_D213_EN_00058c
230 V AC
24 V DC
1) The
number of fans depends on the frame size.
Connection example of a Smart Line Module
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/23
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Technical data
Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
Smart Line Module
6SL37306TE35-5AU3
6SL37306TE37-3AU3
6SL37306TE41-1AU3
6SL37306TE41-1BU3
6SL37306TE41-1CU3
6SL37306TE41-3AU3
6SL37306TE41-3BU3
6SL37306TE41-3CU3
6SL37306TE41-7AU3
6SL37306TE41-7BU3
6SL37306TE41-7CU3
300
250
250
235
400
355
355
315
560
500
500
450
710
630
630
555
900
800
800
730
For parallel connection, mounted to the right
of the Line Connection Module
3
For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module
Rated power
kW
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) kW
kW
• For I H DC (60 Hz, 460 V) kW
• For I H DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC A
550
730
1,050
1,300
1,700
• Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC
A
A
490
825
650
1,095
934
1,575
1,157
1,950
1,513
2,550
A
A
463
694
614
921
883
1,324
1,093
1,639
1,430
2,145
A
A
1.35
1.8
1.35
1.8
1.4
3.6
1.5
5.4
1.7
5.4
F
F
8,400
42,000
12,000
60,000
16,800
67,200
18,900
75,600
28,800
115,200
kW
cfm [m3/s]
3.7
763 [0.36]
4.7
763 [0.36]
7.1
1,650 [0.78]
11.0
2,290 [1.08]
11.5
2,290 [1.08]
dB(A)
73 [69]
73 [69]
73 [70]
73 [70]
73 [70]
ft [m]
ft [m]
13,100 [4,000]
19,700 [6,000]
IP20
13,100 [4,000]
19,700 [6,000]
IP20
15,750 [4,800]
23,600 [7,200]
IP20
15,750 [4,800]
23,600 [7,200]
IP20
15,750 [4,800]
23,600 [7,200]
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
600 [270]
GX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
600 [270]
GX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,710 [775]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,710 [775]
JX
Input current
• Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Smart Line Module
• Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level LpA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max. 4)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2) The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request..
5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
3/24
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
12
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Technical data
Line Voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Smart Line Module
6SL37306TG35-5AU3
6SL37306TG38-8AU3
6SL3730-
6TG38-8BU3
6SL37306TG38-8CU3
6SL37306TG41-2AU3
6SL3730-
6TG41-2BU3
6SL3730-
6TG41-2CU3
6SL37306TG41-7AU3
6SL3730-
6TG41-7BU3
6SL3730-
6TG41-7CU3
400
450
350
405
630
710
560
665
800
1,000
710
885
1,200
1,400
1,000
1,255
A
A
A
550
490
825
900
800
1,350
1,200
1,068
1,800
1,700
1,513
2,550
A
A
463
694
757
1,135
1,009
1,513
1,430
2,145
A
A
1.35
1.2 [1.0]
1.4
2.5 [2.1]
1.5
3.7 [3.1]
1.7
3.7 [3.1]
5,600
28,000
7,400
29,600
11,100
44,400
14,400
57.600
6.5
1,650 [0.78]
12.0
2,290 [1.08]
13.8
2,290 [1.08]
For parallel connection, mounted to the right
of the Line Connection Module
For parallel connection, mounted to the left
of the Line Connection Module
Rated power
kW
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW
kW
• For I HDC (60 Hz, 575 V) kW
• For I HDC (50 Hz, 690 V) 3
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC
Input current
• Rated current I N E • Maximum current I max E
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Smart Line Module
• Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 575V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max. 4)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width • Height 5) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size
F
F
kW
4.3
cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36]
dB(A)
73 [69]
73 [70]
73 [70]
73 [70]
ft [m]
ft [m]
7,400 [2,250]
11,000 [3,375]
IP20
9,000 [2,750]
13,500 [4,125]
IP20
9,000 [2,750]
13,500 [4,125]
IP20
9,000 [2,750]
13,500 [4,125]
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
600 [270]
GX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,210 [550]
HX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,750 [795]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,750 [795]
JX
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2) The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4) Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request..
5) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
12
ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/25
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Options
The table below lists the available options for Smart Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details).
3
Available Options
CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus)
CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet)
Monitoring of precharge function
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the
cabinet door
CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP)
Performance expansion for CU320-2
CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET)
Without input line reactor
Enclosure space heater
50/250 kW braking unit for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V
and 660 ... 690 V
50/250 kW braking unit for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
Base (plinth) 100mm
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60]
Side panel (right)
Side panel (left)
Enclosure IP43 [includes M60]
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60]
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet
through floor)
Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43
& M54]
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
Lifting beam/eye bolts
UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54]
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
1)
Only in combination with options K90 or K95.
3/26
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Option
code
G20 1)
G33 1)
G56
K08 1)
K90
K94 1)
K95
L22
L55
L62
L65
M06
M07
M21
M23
M26
M27
M43
M54
M59
M60
M80
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
M86
M87
M90
U90
U91
Available Options
Special enclosure paint color [specify color]
Assembly into transport sections [specify sections]
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Customer drawings in dxf format
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
Documentation English/French
Nameplate English/French
Visual Inspection by customer
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and
insulation test
Customer specific test (on request)
Option
code
Y09
Y11
Y31
Y32
Y33
D02
D14
D58
T58
F03
F71
F77
F97
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Options
Option combination matrix for Smart Line Modules
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as
standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
Electrical Options
G20
G20
G33
G33
K08
K90
K94
K95
L22
L62
L65
–
–
K08
K90
–
K94
K95
–
L22
L62
–
L65
–
Mechanical Options
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M43
M54
M59
M60
M90
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
M06
–
–
M21
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/27
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Smart Line Modules
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
3
– Combination is not possible
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y31
Y32
Y33
–
–
Y32
–
Y33
–
–
3/28
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Overview
In contrast to Basic Line Modules and Smart Line Modules,
Active Line Modules control the DC bus voltage and keep it
constant despite fluctuations in the line voltage (the line
voltage must remain within the permissible tolerance range).
Braking Modules with associated braking resistors may be
added. They would typically be needed only if it is necessary
to brake the load in the event of a power supply failure.
Active Line Modules are available for the following voltages
and currents. Power ratings can be increased by connecting
up to four identical Active Line Modules in parallel.
Active Line Modules are controlled rectifiers that supply power
from the AC supply to the DC bus, and that are also capable of
regenerating 100% continuous power from the DC bus back to
the line.
Line voltage
Rated power
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
132 … 1,000 kW
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
400 (560) … 1,150 (1,400) kW
Active Line Modules draw a virtually sinusoidal current from
the supply system with very low current harmonics that meet
the requirements of IEEE 519-1992 at the drive input
terminals. In addition, Active Line Modules allow the input power to be adjusted within the range of approx. 0.80 leading to 0.80 lagging (default setting is unity power factor).
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Design
Active Line Modules are always operated together with an
Active Interface Module, which contains the associated
Clean Power Filter and pre-charging circuit. The integrated
line filter ensures compliance with the EMC requirements for
the “second environment”.
Parallel connection of Active Line Modules to increase
the power rating
The Active Line Module and Active Interface Module are
supplied as a complete, fully wired unit, i.e., the customer
does not need to supply any further cables or carry out any
other wiring tasks.
Two Active Line Modules supplied with power via two
separate Line Connection Modules
With this arrangement, each Active Line Module is supplied
by a Line Connection Module, which includes a circuit
breaker disconnect and fuses. The Active Line Module is
always located to the right of the Line Connection Module,
and has an order no. ending in “AU3”, example: 6SL37307T…-.AU3.
The precharge circuitry is built into Active Line Modules, and
the Line Connection Module with option L42 (for Active Line
Module) may, depending on the power rating, include the
power supply for the precharge circuit, as well as a contactor
or motorized circuit breaker to bypass (bridge) the precharge
circuit after precharging the DC bus capacitors.
There are two alternative arrangements for connecting
Active Line Modules in parallel to obtain drive line-ups with
a higher power rating.
Active Line Modules with their associated Line Connection
Modules may be located anywhere in the line-up.
Note that for a line-up with multiple disconnects special lock
out/tag out procedures may be required on site.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/29
3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Design
Two Active Line Modules supplied with power via a single
Line Connection Module
In the alternative arrangement, two Active Line Modules can be connected to the left and right of a single Line Connection Module, which results in a very compact design
for the line infeed. The power connections on the Active
Line Module on the left of the Line Connection Module are a mirror image of the standard unit mounted to its right.
For a parallel connection, the Active Line Module to the left
has an order no. ending in “CU3.”
The Line Connection Module for parallel connection
includes a single circuit breaker with two sets of line fuses,
for selective individual protection of each line module.
3
Common
DC Bus
Line
Connection
Module
Active
Interface
Module
Active
Line
Module
Motor
Module
6SL3730-7T...-.AU3
AC line supply
Active
Line
Module
Active
Interface
Module
Line
Connection
Module
6SL3730-7T...-.CU3
AC to motor
Note:
Please note that only Active Line Modules with exactly the
same output rating may be connected in parallel. Due to the
possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current of the
Active Line Modules must be derated by 5%.
Active
Interface
Module
Active
Line
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
6SL3730-7T...-.AU3
AC line supply
AC to motor
Active Line Modules connected in parallel are operated on
a common control unit, and the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables
need to be considered.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Selection and ordering guide
Rated power
at 460 (400) V
Note for parallel
connection
Active Line Module
Rated power
at 575 (690) V
Mounting relative
to Line Connection
Module
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 540 … 720 V DC)
–
150 (132)
–
180 (160)
–
270 (235)
–
350 (300)
–
450 (380)
–
560 (500)
–
710 (630)
Left
Order No.
kW
1,000 (900)
–
6SL3730-7TE41-4AU3
Left
6SL3730-7TE41-4CU3
kW
3/30
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6SL3730-7TE32-1AU3
6SL3730-7TE32-6AU3
6SL3730-7TE33-8AU3
6SL3730-7TE35-0AU3
6SL3730-7TE36-1AU3
6SL3730-7TE38-4AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TE41-0CU3
Note for parallel
connection
Mounting relative
to Line Connection
Module
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 700 … 900 (1035) V DC)
–
450 (560)
–
630 (800)
Left
–
900 (1,100)
Left
–
1,200 (1,400)
Left
Active Line Module
Order No.
6SL3730-7TG35-8AU3
6SL3730-7TG37-4AU3
6SL3730-7TG37-4CU3
6SL3730-7TG41-0AU3
6SL3730-7TG41-0CU3
6SL3730-7TG41-3AU3
6SL3730-7TG41-3CU3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Block diagram
The Active Line Module is controlled by the CU320-2 Control Unit. Communication between the Control Unit and module is established via DRIVE-CLiQ connections. The Active Interface Module is included in the scope of delivery of the Active
Line Module.
Cabinet Module
Cabinet Module
DC busbar
Cabinet Module
230 V AC
Line
Connection
Module
(Option L42)
Supply
infeed
L1
L2
L3
U1
V1
W1
PE
-X41
4
3
2
1
-F101
-F102 Fan
2
Bypass
contactor
1
-X2
-X1
≈
READY
DC LINK
POWER OK
Internal
-X9
power supply
P24 V
1
=
M
2
=
3
Activation of
4
bypass contactor
5
Activation of
6
precharging
contactor
4
Precharging contactor
+Temp
-Temp
EP + 24 V
EP M1
U2
V2
W2
PE
U1
V1
W1
PE
-X1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
Voltage
Sensing
Module VSM10
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
Active
Line
Module
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
-X609
PE
1
P24
2
4
P24
3
M
4
M
L 5
6
N7
8
9
1
10
11
2
12
13
14 Contactors
open
LED
READY
LEDs
Active
Interface
Module
3
X400 X401 X402 3
3
DRIVE-CLiQ socket
X500
Connection
for Braking
Module
DCPA
DCNA
DCP
DCN
~
=
-F10
1
2
3
4
-F11
Connection between Active Interface Module and
Active Line Module pre-assembled at the factory
IPD Card
-F24
Auxiliary power supply:
P24L
P24L
M
M
Fan
-X100
1 2 3 4 5 6
-X42
1
2
3
4
380 - 480 V 1 ph AC
or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC
230 V AC
24 V DC
G_D213_EN_00060c
Connection example of an Active Line Module (frame size FI/FX and GI/GX)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/31
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Block diagram
Cabinet Module
Cabinet Module
DC busbar
X500 3
230 V AC
M
L1
L2
L3
4
Fan
2
Precharging
contactor
1
contactor
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
Connection for
Braking Module
DCPA
DCNA
-X2
≈
U1 -X1
V1
W1
PE
-X9
L1
L2
U2
V2
W2
PE
Line Connection
Module
(Option L42)
DCP
DCN
~
=
-F10
-F11
-F20
-F21
Connection between Active Interface Module and Active
Line Module pre-assembled at the factory
1 2 3 4 5 6
P24L
P24L
M
M
internal
Fan1)
IPD Card
-F24
Auxiliary power supply:
-X42
1
2
3
4
Fan
-X100
1
2
3
4
READY
DC LINK
Internal
POWER OK
power supply
-X9
P24
V
1
=
M
2
=
3
Activation of
4
bypass contactor
5
Activation of
6
precharging
-F101
-F102
+Temp
-Temp
EP +24 V
EP M1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
-X41
4
3
2
1
Voltage
Sensing
Module VSM10
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
Active
Line
Module
LEDs
Cabinet Module
-X609
PE
1
P24
4
2
P24
3
M
4
M
L 5
6
N7
8
9
1
10
11
2
12
13
14 Contactors
open
T1
T2
T3
-X1
L1
L2
L3
PE
LED
READY
DRIVE-CLiQ socket
Active
Interface
Module
3
X400 X401 X402 3
380 - 480 V 1 ph AC
or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC
230 V AC
24 V DC
G_D213_EN_00061c
1) The
Connection example of an Active Line Module (frame size HI/HX and JI/JX)
3/32
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
number of fans depends on the frame size.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Technical data
Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
Active Line Module
6SL37307TE32-1AU3
6SL37307TE32-6AU3
6SL37307TE33-8AU3
6SL37307TE35-0AU3
Rated power
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) • For IH DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For IH DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC kW
kW
kW
kW
150
132
132
115
180
160
160
145
270
235
235
210
350
300
300
270
A
A
A
235
209
352
291
259
436
425
378
637
549
489
823
Input current
• Rated current INE • Maximum current I max E A
A
210
315
260
390
380
570
490
735
A
1.27
0.6
0.63
1.27
0.6
1.13
1.52
1.2
1.8
1.52
1.2
1.8
4,200
41,600
5,200
41,600
7,800
76,800
9,600
76,800
kW
cfm [m3/s]
4.4 [4.3]
1,380 [0.65]
5.1 [4.9]
1,380 [0.65]
7.2 [6.9]
2,760 [1.3]
9.0 [8.7]
2,760 [1.3]
dB(A)
73 [71]
73 [71]
74 [72]
74 [72]
ft [m]
ft [m]
8,860 [2,700]
13,300 [4,050]
IP20
8,860 [2,700]
13,300 [4,050]
IP20
8,860 [2,700]
13,300 [4,050]
IP20
8,860 [2,700]
13,300 [4,050]
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
840 [380]
FX + FI
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
840 [380]
FX + FI
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,170 [530]
GX + GI
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,170 [530]
GX + GI
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Basic Line Module
• Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA4)
at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max.5)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions
• Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size (ALM + AIM)
A
F
F
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2)The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined.
5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request..
6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
3
12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/33
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Technical data
Active Line Module
Line Voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
6SL37307TE36-1AU3
6SL37307TE38-4AU3
For parallel connection, mounted to the left of the Line Connection Module
3
6SL37307TE41-0AU3
6SL37307TE41-4AU3
6SL37307TE41-0CU3
6SL37307TE41-4CU3
Rated power
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 400 V) • For IH DC (60 Hz, 460 V) • For IH DC (50 Hz, 400 V) DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC • Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC kW
kW
kW
kW
450
380
380
335
560
500
500
465
710
630
630
545
1,000
900
900
780
A
A
A
678
603
1,017
940
837
1,410
1,103
982
1,654
1,574
1,404
2,361
Input current
• Rated current INE • Maximum current I max E A
A
605
907
840
1,260
985
1,477
1,405
2,107
A
1.57
4.6
3.6
1.57
4.6
3.6
1.67
4.9
5.4
1,67
4.9
5.4
12,600
134,400
16,800
134,400
18,900
230,400
28,800
230,400
kW
cfm [m3/s]
12.1 [11.7]
3,350 [1.58]
14.3 [13.8]
3,350 [1.58]
18.3 [17.6]
4,000 [1.88]
22.7 [21.8]
4,000 [1.88]
dB(A)
79 [77]
79 [77]
80 [78]
80 [78]
ft [m]
ft [m]
12,800 [3,900]
19,200 [5,850]
IP20
12,800 [3,900]
19,200 [5,850]
IP20
12,800 [3,900]
19,200 [5,850]
IP20
12,800 [3,900]
19,200 [5,850]
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
2,050 [930]
HX + HI
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
2,050 [930]
HX + HI
55.1 [1,400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
3,000 [1,360]
JX + JI
55.1 [1,400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
3,000 [1,360]
JX + JI
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 460 (400) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Basic Line Module
• Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA4)
at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max.5)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions
• Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size (ALM + AIM)
A
F
F
1)The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2)The current demand for the 460 (400) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined.
5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request..
6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
(IP54) enclosure.
3/34
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
12 ventilated SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Technical data
Line Voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
Note: UL Listing is valid only for <600 V
Active Line Module
6SL37307TG35-8AU3
For parallel connection, mounted to the left
of the Line Connection Module
Rated power
kW
• For I N DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I N DC (50 Hz, 690 V) kW
6SL37307TG37-4AU3
6SL37307TG41-0AU3
6SL37307TG41-3AU3
6SL37307TG37-4CU3
6SL37307TG41-0CU3
6SL37307TG41-3CU3
450
560
630
800
900
1,100
1,200
1,400
450
550
560
705
800
980
1,000
1,215
3
• For I H DC (60 Hz, 575 V) • For I H DC (50 Hz, 690 V) DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC
kW
kW
A
644
823
1,148
1,422
• Base load current I H DC 1) • Maximum current I max DC A
A
573
966
732
1,234
1,022
1,722
1,266
2,133
Input current
• Rated current I NE • Maximum current I max E A
A
575
862
735
1,102
1,025
1,537
1,270
1,905
A
1.57
4.6
2.6 [2.1]
1.67
4.9
3.8 [3.1]
1.87
4.9
3.8 [3.1]
1.87
4.9
3.8 [3.1]
7,400
59,200
11,100
153,600
14,400
153,600
19,200
153,600
18.6 [19.2]
4,000 [1,88]
22.1 [22.8]
4,000 [1.88]
24.9 [26.1]
4,000 [1.88]
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply • 230V AC auxiliary power supply • 575 (690) V AC 2) DC bus capacitance
• Basic Line Module
• Drive line-up, max.
Power loss, max.3)
• At 60 Hz 575V [50 Hz 690V] Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA 4)
(1M) at 60 [50] Hz
Output cable length, max.5)
• Shielded • Unshielded Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions
• Width • Height 6) • Depth Weight, approx. Frame size
A
F
F
kW
13.0 [13.6]
cfm [m3/s] 3,350 [1.58]
dB(A)
79 [77]
79 [77]
79 [77]
79 [77]
ft [m]
ft [m]
7,400 [2,250]
11,100 [3,375]
IP20
7,400 [2,250]
11,100 [3,375]
IP20
7,400 [2,250]
11,100 [3,375]
IP20
7,400 [2,250]
11,100 [3,375]
IP20
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
39.4 [1,000]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
2,050 [930]
HX + HI
55.1 [1,400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
3,000 [1,360]
JX + JI
55.1 [1,400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
3,000 [1,360]
JX + JI
55.1 [1,400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
3,000 [1,360]
JX + JI
1) The base load current I H DC is the basis for a duty cycle of duration 300 s with an overload of 150% x I H DC for 60 s, or I max DC for 5 s.
2)The current demand for the 575 (690) V AC auxiliary power supply is drawn from the line input voltage.
3)The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
4)Total sound pressure level of Active Interface Module and Active Line Module combined.
5)Sum of lengths of all motor cables and DC bus. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request..
6)The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA
12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/35
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Options
The table below lists the available options for Active Line Modules (refer to Description of the Options for details).
3
Available Options
CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus)
CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet)
Monitoring of precharge function
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the
cabinet door
CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP)
Performance expansion for CU320-2
CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET)
Enclosure space heater
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
Base (plinth) 100mm
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60]
Side panel (right)
Side panel (left)
Enclosure IP43 [includes M60]
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60]
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet
through floor)
Additional touch protection [included in M23, M43
& M54]
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
Lifting beam/eye bolts
UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54]
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
1)
Only in combination with options K90 or K95.
3/36
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Option
code
G20 1)
G33 1)
G56
K08 1)
K90
K94 1)
K95
L55
L61
L62
L64
L65
M06
M07
M21
M23
M26
M27
M43
M54
M59
M60
M80
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
M86
M87
M90
U90
U91
Available Options
Special enclosure paint color [specify color]
Assembly into transport sections [specify sections]
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Customer drawings in dxf format
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
Documentation English/French
Nameplate English/French
Visual Inspection by customer
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test
Customer specific test (on request)
Option
code
Y09
Y11
Y31
Y32
Y33
D02
D14
D58
T58
F03
F71
F77
F97
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Options
Option combination matrix for Active Line Modules
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available
as standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
Electrical Options
G20
G20
G33
G33
K08
K90
K94
K95
K61
L62
L64
L65
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
K08
K90
–
K94
K95
–
L61
L62
–
L64
–
–
L65
–
–
–
M59
M60
M90
Mechanical Options
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M43
M54
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
M06
–
–
M21
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
3/37
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Active Line Modules
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
3
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y31
Y32
Y33
–
–
Y32
–
Y33
–
–
3/38
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
5
Motor Modules & Braking
Modules
4
4/3 Overview of Motor Modules
Motor Modules Chassis format
Motor Modules Booksize format
Control of Motor Modules
Dynamic braking
4/4
Motor Modules Chassis format
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
4/19
Motor Modules Booksize format
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
4/28
Braking Modules
Braking Modules – Chassis mounted
Motor Modules Chassis format
configured as braking units
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules
Overview of motor modules
Motor Modules are the link between the 3-phase AC motors
and the common DC bus. They are IGBT based pulse width
modulated (PWM) inverters that convert DC to variable
voltage, variable frequency 3-phase AC to operate motors at
variable speed. Motor Modules are inherently capable of four
quadrant (4Q) operation, meaning that they can operate the
motor in forward and reverse directions of operation, both
when motoring (supplying power from the DC bus to the
motor) or regenerating (taking power from the motor and
feeding it to the DC bus). Motor Modules are available in
two designs:
4
• Chassis format: Chassis format Motor Modules cover the power range from 125 to 900 kW (150 to 1,150 HP) at
380 – 480 V, and 70 to 1,000 kW (100 to 1,250 HP) at 500 – 600 V. The power rating can be increased up to almost 4,000 kW (5,000 HP) by connecting up to four
motor modules in parallel. Each chassis format Motor
Module is mounted in its own cabinet.
• Booksize format: At the low end of the power range from 4.8 kW to 82 kW (5 to 100 HP) at 380 V to 480 V only, Motor Modules are available as Booksize Cabinet Kits that are installed in Booksize Base Cabinets. Each Booksize Base Cabinet can contain multiple Booksize Cabinet Kits.
Motor Module cabinets may include optional power
components (such as output reactors or filters) and control
components (such as control units and/or encoder interface
modules) as detailed in the respective sections. Alternatively,
control components may be installed remotely and
connected to the Motor Module by DRIVE-CLiQ cables. For
example, control units, I/O modules and encoder interface
modules may be mounted in a central control cabinet that
does not contain any power circuits, or alternatively encoder
interface and temperature sensor modules may be mounted
near the motor, as appropriate.
Each motor module may have a dedicated control unit, or
alternatively a Line Module and multiple Motor Modules may
be controlled by a single control unit – the quantity of power
modules controlled by a control unit depends on the type
of control (vector or servo) and the required performance.
There are various possibilities to achieve dynamic braking:
• Braking Modules mounted in chassis: Braking Modules
with continuous/peak braking powers of 25/125 kW
(frame size FX) or 50/250 kW (frame size GX, HX, JX) can
be mounted inside each chassis power block. Chassis
with multiple power blocks can have a braking module mounted in each power block (2 for frame size HX, 3 for frame size JX). These braking modules are offered with matching braking resistors (each braking module requires its own resistor).
• Motor Modules configured as Braking Modules: All
chassis format Motor Modules can be configured as
braking modules, where a 3-phase resistor (or 3 resistors
in wye connection) is connected to the output instead
of a motor. Depending on the choice of motor module,
continuous/peak braking powers in the range of approx. 100/150 kW to 1,500/2,200 kW can be obtained. SINAMICS S120 drive firmware includes the functionality to operate a motor module as a braking module as standard.
Central Braking Modules as offered in the IEC product
spectrum of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are not
included in this North American catalog since they are not
UL listed. However, for line-ups that do not require UL listing
they are available as another alternative to achieve high
braking powers with a fast response time.
Common
DC Bus
Booksize Base Cabinet
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Line
Connection
Module
AC to motor
4/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Line
Module
AC line supply
Booksize
Cabinet
Kit
Booksize
Cabinet
Kit
AC to motor
Booksize
Cabinet
Kit
AC to motor
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
AC to motor
Motor
Module
used as
Braking
Module
External
Braking
Resistor
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules
Overview
Design
Motor Modules in the chassis format contain the following components:
•Nickel plated DC bus, including DC connections to the Motor Module
•Nickel plated bus stabs for connecting motor cables for
Motor Modules frame sizes FX and GX; for Motor Modules frame sizes HX and JX, the connection is made directly on
the unit
•Cable support bar for the electric power cables
•DRIVE-CLiQ interface (3 DRIVE-CLiQ sockets), without
Control Unit
•Customer terminal interface -X55
•Auxiliary power supply system (6-pole) for the auxiliary power supplies, including cable connections for looping through to the next Cabinet Module
•Ground (PE) busbar (60 × 10 mm), including jumper for looping through to the next Cabinet Module
•EMC-compliant design by additional shielding measures and appropriate routing of wiring.
Each Motor Module chassis format is mounted in its own
cabinet. Motor Modules are available for the following voltages and currents.
Line voltage
Rated power
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
125 … 900 kW [150 … 1,150 HP]
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph.
70 (75) … 1,000 (1,200) kW
[75 … 1,250 HP @ 575V]
Up to four identical Motor Modules may be connected in
parallel to increase the available shaft power up to approx.
4,750 HP (3,800 kW) at 575 V. Motor Modules connected in
parallel are controlled by a single common control unit. Due
to the possibility of unequal current sharing the rated current
of the Motor Modules must be derated by 5%. Unless each
Motor Module is connected to a single motor winding, some
impedance must be provided on the output either by using
motor reactors, or by running separate cables of a minimum
length from each Motor Module.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/3
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Selection and ordering data
4
Rated power
Rated power
at 460 (400) V
at 460 V
kW
HP
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC)
125 (110)
150
160 (132)
200
200 (160)
250
300
250 (200)
300 (250)
400
500
355 (315)
450 (400)
600
500 (450)
700
650 (560)
800
800 (710)
1,000
1,150
900 (800)
Rated power
Rated power
at 575 (690)
at 575 V
kW
HP
Line voltage 500 … 690 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 V DC)
75
60 (75)
75 (90)
100
90( 110)
125
110 (132)
150
132 (160)
150
160 (200)
200
200 (250)
250
250 (315)
300
300 (400)
400
350 (450
450
450 (560)
600
560 (710)
700
630 (800)
800
750 (900)
900
800 (1,000)
1,000
1,000 (1,200)
1,250
Rated output
current IN
A
kA
Motor Module
chassis format
Order No.
210
260
310
380
490
605
745
840
985
1,260
1,405
65
65
65
65
65
65
84
84
84
100
100
6SL3720-1TE32-1AU3
6SL3720-1TE32-6AU3
6SL3720-1TE33-1AU3
6SL3720-1TE33-8AU3
6SL3720-1TE35-0AU3
6SL3720-1TE36-1AU3
6SL3720-1TE37-5AU3
6SL3720-1TE38-4AU3
6SL3720-1TE41-0AU3
6SL3720-1TE41-2AU3
6SL3720-1TE41-4AU3
Rated output
current IN
A
SCCR 1)
kA
Motor Module
chassis format
Order No.
85
100
120
150
175
216
260
330
410
465
575
735
810
910
1,025
1,270
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
84
84
84
100
100
100
6SL3720-1TG28-5AU3
6SL3720-1TG31-0AU3
6SL3720-1TG31-2AU3
6SL3720-1TG31-5AU3
6SL3720-1TG31-8AU3
6SL3720-1TG32-2AU3
6SL3720-1TG32-6AU3
6SL3720-1TG33-3AU3
6SL3720-1TG34-1AU3
6SL3720-1TG34-7AU3
6SL3720-1TG35-8AU3
6SL3720-1TG37-4AU3
6SL3720-1TG38-1AU3
6SL3720-1TG38-8AU3
6SL3720-1TG41-0AU3
6SL3720-1TG41-3AU3
SCCR 1)
1) Pending completion of the UL listing project of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules, the SCCR of the line-up is limited by the SCCR of the smallest Motor Module it contains.
4/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Block diagram
Motor Modules are controlled by the CU320-2 DP or CU320-2
PN Control Unit. By selecting option codes K90 or K95 the
Control Unit is included in the motor module cabinet, complete with the DRIVE-CLiQ cable connecting it to the
motor module. However, if the Control Unit is also used to
control other motor modules, or if the Control Unit is to be
mounted separately, the DRIVE-CLiQ cables are excluded and
need to be added by others.
For additional information, please refer to the section on
Integration Engineering, page 5/8.
Cabinet Module
DC busbar
DCP
DCN
DCPA
DCNA
=
DCPS
DCNS
4
=
-X9
1
2
3
4
5
6
READY
LEDs
Customer
terminal
block
-X55
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
Motor Module
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
X400 X401 X402
DC LINK
POWER OK
P24 V
-X2
M
=
Internal
power supply
~
U2
V2
W2
M
3~
PE
-F10
L1
L2
-F11
Fan
-F20
2)
3)
380 - 480 V 1 ph AC
or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC
+Temp
-Temp
EP +24 V
EP M1
-X46
1
2
3
4
BR Output+
BR OutputFB Input+
FB Input-
-X42
1
2
3
4
P24L
P24L
M
M
internal
Fan1)
M
IPD Card
-F24
Auxiliary power supply:
-X100
1 2 3 4 5 6
-F21
-X41
4
3
2
1
G_D213_EN_00064c
230 V AC
24 V DC
1) The number and the terminals of the fans depend on the frame size.
2) Connection of temperature sensor for motors without DRIVE-CliQ interface.
3) Required for Safety Integrated.
Connection example of a Motor Module
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37206SL37206SL37201TE32-1AU3 1TE32-6AU3 1TE33-1AU3
6SL37201TE33-8AU3
6SL37206SL37201TE35-0AU3 1TE36-1AU3 kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
125 [150]
110
110 [125]
90
160 [200]
132
132 [150]
110
200 [250]
160
160 [200]
132
250 [300]
200
200 [250]
160
300 [400]
250
250 [350]
200
355 [500]
315
315 [400]
250
A
A
A
A
210
260
310
380
490
605
205
250
302
370
477
590
178
233
277
340
438
460
307
375
453
555
715
885
A
A
252
312
281
372
335
456
411
588
529
726
653
A
A
245
221
304
362
444
573
707
273
326
400
515
636
A
A
224
277
331
405
523
646
202
250
298
365
470
581
A
A
0.8
0.63
4,200
0.8
1.13
5,200
0.9
1.8
6,300
0.9
1.8
7,800
0.9
1.0
1.8
3.6
9,600
12,600
kHz
kHz
2
2
2
2
2
1.25
8
8
8
8
8
7.5
kW
1.94 [1.86]
2.6 [2.5]
3.1 [2.96]
3.8 [3.67]
4.5 [4.28]
6.3 [5.84]
cfm
[m3/s]
360 [0.17]
487 [0.23]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
1,653 [0.78]
dB(A)
67
69
69
69
69
72
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N
• Base load current I L 3)
4
• Base load current I H 4)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 460 (400) V AC
DC bus capacitance
F
227
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of IL or IH at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual
motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current ILis the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
4) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
6SL37201TE32-6AU3
6SL37201TE33-1AU3
6SL37201TE33-8AU3
6SL37206SL3720-
1TE35-0AU3 1TE36-1AU3
2x 350 MCM
2x 350 MCM
2x 500 MCM
2x 500 MCM
2x 500 MCM
4x 500 MCM
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
kA
65
65
65
65
65
65
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
Output cable length, max.
• Shielded
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37201TE32-1AU3
7)
• Unshielded
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width 8)
• Height 9)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
Frame size
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
ft (m)
ft (m)
Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
7)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/7
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37206SL37201TE37-5AU3
1TE38-4AU3 6SL37201TE41-0AU3
6SL37201TE41-2AU3
6SL37201TE41-4AU3
kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
450 [600]
400
355 [500]
315
500 [700]
450
450 [600]
400
630 [800]
560
500 [700]
450
800 [1,000]
710
630 [900]
560
900 [1,150]
800
800 [1,000]
710
A
A
A
A
745
840
985
1,260
1,405
725
820
960
1,230
1,370
570
700
860
1,127
1,257
1,087
1,230
1,440
1,845
2,055
A
A
894
1,008
907
1,182
1,064
1,512
1,361
1,686
1,517
A
A
871
784
982
1,152
1,474
1,643
884
1,037
1,326
1,479
A
A
795
897
1,051
1,345
1,500
716
807
946
1,211
1,350
A
A
1.0
1.0
1.25
1.4
1.4
3.6
3.6
5.4
5.4
5.4
15,600
16,800
18,900
26,100
28,800
kHz
kHz
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
kW
7.3 [6.68]
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
• Base load current I L 3)
4
• Base load current I H 4)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 460 (400) V AC
DC bus capacitance
F
805
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
7.8 [7.15]
10.2 [9.5]
12.0 [11.1]
13.0 [12.0]
cfm [m3/s] 1,653 [0.78]
1,653 [0.78]
2,331 [1.1]
2,331 [1.1]
2,331 [1.1]
dB(A)
72
72
72
72
72
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/8
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37206SL37201TE37-5AU3
1TE38-4AU3 6SL37201TE41-0AU3
6SL37201TE41-2AU3
6SL37201TE41-4AU3
4x 500 MCM
4x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
kA
84
84
84
100
100
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
ft (m)
ft (m)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width 8)
• Height 9)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
Frame size
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
4
Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
7)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/9
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37201TG28-5AU3
6SL37201TG31-0AU3
6SL37201TG31-2AU3
6SL37201TG31-5AU3
6SL37201TG31-8AU3
6SL37201TG32-2AU3
kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
55 [75]
75
45 [60]
55
75 [100]
90
55 [75]
75
90 [125]
110
75 [100]
90
110 [150]
132
90 [125]
110
132 [150]
160
110 [150]
132
160 [200]
200
132 [200]
160
A
A
A
A
85
100
120
150
175
215
80
95
115
142
170
208
76
89
107
134
157
192
120
142
172
213
255
312
A
A
102
120
108
144
130
180
162
210
189
258
232
A
A
99
89
117
140
175
204
251
105
126
157
184
226
A
A
90
106
128
160
186
229
81
96
115
144
168
206
A
A
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.4
0.4
1.0
1,200
1,200
0.4
2,800
1.0
F
0.4
1,600
2,800
2,800
kHz
kHz
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
kW
1.1 [1.17]
1.3 [1.43]
1.77 [1.89]
1.62 [1.8]
2.5 [2.67]
2.91 [3.09]
cfm
[m3/s]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
360 [0.17]
763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
dB(A)
67
67
67
67
69
69
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
• Base load current I L 3)
4
• Base load current I H 4)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 575 (690) V AC
DC bus capacitance
92
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/10
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technical data
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37201TG28-5AU3
6SL3720-1
6SL3720-
6SL3720-
6SL3720-
6SL3720TG31-0AU3 1TG31-2AU3 1TG31-5AU3 1TG31-8AU3 1TG32-2AU3
2x 350 MCM
2x 350 MCM
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
1,480 [450]
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
320 [145]
FX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
65
65
65
65
65
65
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
2x 350 MCM
2x 350 MCM
2x 500 MCM
2x 500 MCM
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
ft (m)
ft (m)
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width 8)
• Height 9)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
Frame size
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
kA
GX
Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
7)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/11
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technology
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL3720-
6SL37201TG32-6AU3
1TG33-3AU3
6SL37201TG34-1AU3 6SL37201TG34-7AU3 6SL37201TG35-8AU3 kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
200 [250]
250
160 [250]
200
250 [300]
315
200 [300]
250
300 [400]
400
250 [350]
315
400 [450]
450
315 [450]
400
450 [600]
560
400 [500]
450
A
A
A
A
260
330
410
465
575
250
320
400
452
560
233
280
367
416
514
375
480
600
678
840
A
A
312
396
356
492
443
558
502
690
621
A
A
304
273
386
479
544
672
347
431
489
605
A
A
277
352
437
496
614
250
316
394
446
552
0.9
1.0
3900
0.9
1.0
4200
1.0
2.1
7400
1.0
2.1
7400
2.1
kHz
kHz
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
kW
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
• Base load current I L 3)
4
• Base load current I H 4)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 575 (690) V AC
DC bus capacitance
A
A
F
281
1.0
7400
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
3.38 [3.62]
3.98 [4.34]
5.71 [6.13]
6.32 [6.8]
9.7 [10.3]
cfm [m3/s] 763 [0.36]
763 [0.36]
1,653 [0.78]
1,653 [0.78]
1,653 [0.78]
dB(A)
69
72
72
72
69
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/12
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technology
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL3720-
6SL37201TG32-6AU3
1TG33-3AU3
6SL3720-
1TG34-6AU3
6SL37201TG34-7AU3
6SL37201TG35-8AU3 2x 500 MCM
2x 500 MCM
4x 500 MCM
4x 500 MCM
4x 500 MCM
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
16 [400]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
631 [286]
GX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
24 [600]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,080 [490]
HX
kA
65
65
65
65
84
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width 8)
• Height 9)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
Frame size
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
ft (mm)
ft (mm)
Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
7)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/13
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technology
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL37206SL37201TG37-4AU3 1TG38-1AU3 6SL37201TG38-8AU3
6SL37201TG41-0AU3
6SL37201TG41-3AU3
kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
560 [700]
710
500 [600]
630
630 [800]
800
560 [700]
710
710 [900]
900
630 [800]
800
800 [1,000]
1,000
710 [900]
900
1,000 [1,250]
1,200
800 [1,000]
1,000
A
A
A
A
735
810
910
1,025
1,270
710
790
880
1,000
1,230
657
724
814
917
1,136
1,065
1,185
1,320
1,500
1,845
A
A
882
972
875
1,092
983
1,230
1,107
1,524
1,372
A
A
859
774
947
1,064
1,199
1,485
853
958
1,079
1,337
A
A
784
865
971
1,094
1,356
706
778
874
985
1,221
1.25
1.25
3.1
3.1
11,100
1.4
3.1
14,400
3.1
11,100
1.4
3.1
14,400
kHz
kHz
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
kW
10 [10.9]
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 575 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 690 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
• Base load current I L 3)
4
• Base load current I H 4)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current
• Rated current I N DC if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I L DC 3) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
• Rated current I H DC 4) if supplied by
- Basic/Smart Line Module
- Active Line Module
Current demand
• 24V DC auxiliary power supply
• 575 (690) V AC
DC bus capacitance
A
A
F
794
1.4
19,200
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 690V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
10.5 [11.5]
10.6 [11.7]
12 [13.2]
14.2 [16]
cfm [m3/s] 3,123 [1.474]
3,123 [1.474]
3,123 [1.474]
3,123 [1.474]
3,123 [1.474]
dB(A)
72
72
72
72
72
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current I L is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
4) The base load current I H is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/14
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Technology
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 675 … 900 (1,035) V DC)
Note: UL Listing is valid only for ≤ 600 V
Motor Module chassis format
6SL3720-1
6SL3720TG37-4AU3
1TG38-1AU3 6SL37201TG38-8AU3
6SL37201TG41-0AU3
6SL37201TG41-3AU3 6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
6x 500 MCM
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
980 [300]
1,480 [450]
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm]
inch [mm]
inch [mm]
lb [kg]
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
31.5 [800]
87 [2,200]
24 [600]
1,543 [700]
JX
kA
84
84
100
100
100
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
Enclosure (base design)
Enclosure dimensions, nominal
• Width 8)
• Height 9)
• Depth
Weight, approx.
Frame size
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
ft (m)
ft (m)
Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
8) Option L10 (dv/dt filter plus VPL) for frame sizes FX/GX/HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
Option L08 (motor reactor) for frame sizes HX/JX requires a supplementary cabinet 24” (600 mm) wide.
9) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
7)
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/15
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Options
The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules chassis format (refer to Description of the Options for details).
Available Options
CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus)
G20 1)
Base (plinth) 100mm
M06
CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet)
G33 1)
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
M07
Monitoring of precharge function
G56 3)
M21
Safety license for 1 to 5 axes
K01 to
K05
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the
cabinet door
4
Option
code
Option
code
Available Options
K08 1)
SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
K46
SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
K48
SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
Additional SMC30 Sensor Module
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23)
[includes M60]
M23
M26
Side panel (right)
M27
Side panel (left)
Enclosure IP43
[includes M60]
M43
K50
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54)
[includes M60]
M54
K51
K52
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet
through floor)
Terminal interface for the Safe Torque Off and Safe
Stop 1 safety functions
K82
Additional touch protection
TM54F Terminal Module
K87
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
M80
K88 2)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
M81
Safe Brake Adapter SBA, 230 V AC
[included in M23, M43 & M54]
M59
M60
K90
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
M82
Performance expansion for CU320-2
K94 1)
M83
CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET)
K95
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
dV/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
L07
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
M84
Motor reactor
L08
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
M85
dV/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter
L10
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
M86
Output circuit breaker (motorized)
L34
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
M87
Lifting beam/eye bolts
M90
CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP)
DC disconnect with precharge circuit for the associated DC
bus capacitance (includes M60)
Enclosure space heater
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX)
for line voltages of 380 ... 480 V and 660 ... 690 V
L37 2)
L55
UL listing per UL508A
[requires M23, M43 or M54]
U90
L61
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
L62
Special enclosure paint color
[specify color]
Y09
Assembly into transport sections
[specify sections]
Y11
U91
25/125 kW braking unit (for frame size FX)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
L64
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
Y31
50/250 kW braking unit (for frame size GX/HX/JX)
for line voltages of 500 ... 600 V
L65
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y32
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y33
Customer drawings in dxf format
D02
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
D14
Documentation English/French
D58
Nameplate English/French
T58
Visual Inspection by customer
F03
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
F71
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and
insulation test
F77
Customer specific test (on request)
F97
1)
2)
3)
Only in combination with option K90 or K95.
These options are not yet UL listed and cannot be included in a UL listed line-up.
Only in combination with option L37.
4/16
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Options
Option combination matrix for Motor Modules Chassis format
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as
standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
Electrical Options
G20
G33
G33
K46
K48
K50
K51
–
–
–
–
–
K88
K90
K95
L07
L08
L10
L34
L37
L61
L62
L64
L65
–
G20
–
K46
–
K48
K50
–
–
K51
–
–
4
–
–
K88
–
K90
–
K95
–
L07
L08
–
L10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L34
–
L37
–
–
L61
–
–
–
–
–
–
L62
–
–
L64
–
–
–
–
L65
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mechanical Options
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M43
M54
M59
M60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M90
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
M06
–
M21
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/17
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Chassis Format
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
4
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y31
Y32
Y33
–
–
Y32
–
Y33
–
–
4/18
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Overview
Motor Modules are also available as Booksize Cabinet Kits
at 380 V to 480 V (DC bus voltage 510 V to 720 V).
The following Motor Modules are available:
•Single Motor Modules for power ratings of 5 to 100 HP
(4.8 kW to 82 kW at 400 V) to feed a single motor
4
Design
Motor Modules booksize format are configured as Booksize
Cabinet Kits, which are then factory mounted in Booksize
Base Cabinets that contain all components and wiring
necessary for operation (Kits cannot be purchased separately,
only mounted in a Booksize Base Cabinet).
Several Booksize Cabinet Kits can be installed in one Booksize
Base Cabinet. The number of Booksize Cabinet Kits that can
be installed in a Booksize Base Cabinet is determined solely
on the basis of the available cabinet width and the width
of the kits, which in turn depends on the power rating. The
number of Booksize Kits mounted in a specific Base Cabinet
must be specified in plain text.
Each Booksize Motor Module is individually connected to
the DC bus of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module via fixed
mounted fuses. (The DC bus integrated in the Booksize
modules is not used).
The basic version of a Booksize Cabinet Kit comprises the
following components:
•Motor Module, booksize format
•Fuses for each Motor Module
•Customer terminal interface -X55.1 located in the
connection area of the Booksize Base Cabinet
•Shield connection plate
•Complete electrical interconnections to the Booksize Base Cabinet Interfaces
Booksize Base Cabinets can be provided as NEMA 12
ventilated (IP54) enclosures without additional temperature
derating. However, note that there are some differences
between Booksize and Chassis format Motor Modules with
respect to technical data and derating. Please refer to the
engineering information section 7.
Selection and ordering data
Rated
Rated
Rated
Single Motor Module
Inpower at
power
output
stall. Booksize Cabinet Kit
460 (400) V at 460 V current IN width
kW
HP
A
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC)
5.5 (4.8)
5
9
11 (9.7)
10
18
18 (16)
20
30
28 (24)
30
45
37 (32)
40
60
53 (46)
60
85
82 (71)
100
132
mm
Order No.
100
100
100
200
200
200
300
6SL3720-1TE21-0AU3
6SL3720-1TE21-8AU3
6SL3720-1TE23-0AU3
6SL3720-1TE24-5AU3
6SL3720-1TE26-0AU3
6SL3720-1TE28-5AU3
6SL3720-1TE31-3AU3
For all Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits: SCCR 65 kA*
Booksize base cabinets for installation of booksize kits.
Usable
install.
width
Weight Dimensions for base Booksize Base
approx. IP20 design
Cabinet
(W x D x H) 1)
mm
lb [kg] inch [mm]
Order No.
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
(DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC)
31.5 x 23.6 x 86.6
375
6SL3720-1TX38-0AU3
600
[170]
[800 x 600 x 2,200]
47.2 x 23.6 x 86.6
520
6SL3720-1TX41-2AU3
1,000
[240]
[1,200 x 600 x 2,200]
1) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21) and by
16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated
(IP54) enclosure.
* Note that UL listing of Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits is not yet complete.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/19
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Block diagram
Motor Modules are controlled by the CU320-2 DP or CU320-2
PN Control Unit. By selecting option codes K90 or K95 the
Control Unit is included in the motor module cabinet,
complete with the DRIVE-CLiQ cable connecting it to the
motor module. However, if the Control Unit is also used to
control other motor modules, or if the Control Unit is to be
mounted separately, the DRIVE-CLiQ cables are excluded
need to be added by others.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS
Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
Cabinet Module (Booksize Base Cabinet)
DC busbar
=
+
M
Customer
terminal
block
24 V DC
Internal
power supply
-X21
1
2
3
4
-X55.1
1)
2)
Fan
-X12
1
2
+Temp
-Temp
EP +24 V
EP M1
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 2
~
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
DCP
DCN
LEDs
4
X201 X202
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
X200
READY
DC LINK
-X1
=
Booksize Cabinet Kit
Single Motor Module
~
U2
V2
M
3~
W2
PE
3)
-F24
Auxiliary power
supply:
-X100
1 2 3 4 5 6
380 - 480 V 1 ph AC
or 500 - 690 V 1 ph AC
G_D213_EN_00063c
230 V AC
24 V DC
1) Connection of temperature sensor for motors without DRIVE-CliQ interface.
2) Required for Safety Integrated.
3) Fan insert for rated output current of 132 A.
Connection example of a Single Motor Module, Booksize Cabinet Kit format
4/20
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
Single Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kit
6SL37206SL37201TE21-0AU3 1TE21-8AU3
6SL37201TE23-0AU3
kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
5.5 [5]
4.8
5 [5]
4.1
11 [10]
9.7
9 [10]
8.2
18 [20]
16
15 [15]
13.7
A
A
A
9
18
30
7.7
15.3
25.5
18
36
56
A
11
22
36
A
0.85
0.85
0.9
110
220
710
kHz
kHz
4
4
4
16
16
16
kW
0.08 [0.08]
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
• Base load current I H 3)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current 4)
Current demand
• 24V DC
DC bus capacitance
F
4
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 460V [50 Hz 400V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
0.165 [0.165]
0.29 [0.29]
cfm [m3/s] 17 [0.008]
17 [0.008]
34 [0.016]
dB(A)
< 60
72
< 60
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
#10 AWG
#10 AWG
#10 AWG
230 [70]
328 [100]
328 [100]
492 [150]
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
Weight, approx.
ft [m]
ft [m]
164 [50]
246 [75]
lb [kg]
44 [20]
44 [20]
48 [21.9]
Installation width
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
mm
100
100
100
kA
65
65
65
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
4) For a DC bus voltage of 600 V DC.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
7) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information,
please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
1) Rated
2) Rated
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/21
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Technical data
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
DC bus voltage 510 … 720 V DC
Single Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kit
6SL3720-
6SL37206SL37201TE24-5AU3
1TE26-0AU3
1TE28-5AU3
6SL37201TE31-3AU3
kW [HP]
kW
kW [HP]
kW
28 [30]
24
24 [25]
21
37 [40]
32
32 [40]
28
53 [60]
46
42 [50]
37
82 [100]
71
65 [75]
57
A
A
A
45
60
85
132
38
52
68
105
85
113
141
210
A
54
72
102
158
A
1.2
1.2
1.5
1.5
1,175
1,410
1,880
2,820
kHz
kHz
4
4
4
4
16
16
16
16
kW
0.43 [0.43]
Rated power
• For I L (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I L (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
• For I H (60 Hz, 460 V) 1) 2)
• For I H (50 Hz, 400 V) 1)
Output current
• Rated current I N A
4
• Base load current I H 3)
• Maximum current I max A
DC bus current I d 4)
Current demand
• 24V DC
DC bus capacitance
F
Pulse frequency 5)
• Rated
• Maximum (with derating)
Power loss, max. 6)
• At 60 Hz 475V [50 Hz 400V]
Cooling air requirement
Sound pressure level L pA (1m)
at 60 [50] Hz
Motor connection U2, V2, W2
• Conductor size, max.
0.59 [0.59]
0.75 [0.75]
1.25 [1.25]
cfm [m3/s] 65.7 [0.031]
65.7 [0.031]
93.2 [0.044]
305 [0.144]
dB(A)
< 65
< 60
< 73
< 65
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
#6 AWG
#6 AWG
2/0
2/0
328 [100]
492 [150]
328 [100]
492 [150]
328 [100]
492 [150]
Output cable length, max. 7)
• Shielded
• Unshielded
Weight, approx.
ft [m]
ft [m]
328 [100]
492 [150]
lb [kg]
60 [27]
60 [27]
73 [33]
90 [41]
Installation width
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
mm
200
200
200
300
kA
65
65
65
65
power in kW is of a typical 6-pole standard induction motor with an FLA of I L or I H at the listed voltage and frequency.
power in HP is based on NEC table 430-150. Note that HP ratings are provided as a guide only, for standard 2, 4 or 6 pole motors. Actual motor currents may be higher, especially for motors with 8 or more poles.
3) The base load current IH is the basis for a duty cycle of duration of 300 s with an overload of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
4) For a DC bus voltage of 600 V DC.
5) Information regarding the correlation between the pulse frequency and max. output current/output frequency is provided in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
6) The specified power loss represents the maximum value at 100 % utilization. The value is lower under normal operating conditions.
7) Sum of lengths of all motor cables. Longer cable lengths for specific configurations may be available on request. For additional information,
please refer to the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
1) Rated
2) Rated
4/22
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Options
The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules booksize format (refer to Description of the Options for details).
Motor Module Booksize Cabinet Kits
Available Options
CBC10 Communication Board (CANbus)
CBE20 Communication Board (Ethernet)
Safety license for 1 to 5 axes
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel installed in the
cabinet door
SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
Additional SMC30 Sensor Module
Terminal interface for the Safe Torque Off and
Safe Stop 1 safety functions
TM54F Terminal Module
CU320-2 DP Control Unit (PROFIBUS DP)
Performance expansion for CU320-2
CU320-2 PN Control Unit (PROFINET)
Motor reactor
2 motor reactors in series
DC disconnect with pre-charge circuit for the
associated DC bus capacitance (includes M60)
UL listing per UL508A
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
Option
code
G20 1)
G33 1)
K01 to
K05
K08 1)
K46
K48
K50
K51
K52
K82
K87
K90
K94 1)
K95
L08
L09
L37 2)
U90 3)
U91 3)
Booksize Base Cabinets
Available Options
Enclosure space heater
Base (plinth) 100mm
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23)
[includes M60]
Side panel (right)
Side panel (left)
Enclosure IP43
[includes M60]
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60]
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet
through floor)
EMC shield bus (for connecting cable screens)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
Lifting beam/eye bolts
UL listing per UL508A
[requires M23, M43 or M54]
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
Special enclosure paint color
[specify color]
Assembly into transport sections
[specify sections]
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Customer drawings in dxf format
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
Documentation English/French
Nameplate English/French
Visual Inspection by customer
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and
insulation test
Customer specific test (on request)
1) Only in combination with option K90 or K95.
2) Option L37 is not UL listed and cannot be included
3) Consult factory for availability of these options.
Option
code
L55
M06
M07
M21
M23
M26
M27
M43
M54
M59
M70
M80
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
M86
M87
M90
U90 3)
U91 3)
Y09
Y11
Y31
Y32
Y33
D02
D14
D58
T58
F03
F71
F77
F97
in a UL listed line-up.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/23
4
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Options
Option combination matrix for Booksize Cabinet Kits and Booksize Base Cabinets
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available as
standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
Electrical Options for Booksize Cabinet Kits
G20
G20
4
G33
K46
K48
K50
K51
–
–
–
–
K90
K95
L08
L09
–
G33
–
K46
K48
–
K50
–
–
K51
–
–
–
–
K90
–
K95
–
L08
–
L09
–
Mechanical Options
M06
M21
M23
M43
M54
M59
M60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M90
Y11
U90 1) U91 1)
–
M06
M07
M07
–
M21
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U901)
–
–
U911)
–
–
1) Consult
4/24
factory for availability of these options.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules Booksize Formats
Options
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a lineup by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
M86
M87
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
–
–
–
Label Options
Y31
Y31
Y32
–
Y33
–
Y32
Y33
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/25
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Braking Modules (Chassis Mounted)
Overview
Braking Modules are required to remove energy from the DC bus to brake overhauling loads if the Line Module is not capable of
regenerative operation, or to enable electrical braking even in the event of a power supply failure.
4
Braking modules mounted inside chassis
Matching braking resistors
For lower braking powers, Braking Modules are available for
mounting inside chassis format Line and Motor Modules
(options L61 to L65), and they are cooled by the fans on
these modules. The Braking Module includes the power
electronics and the associated control circuit. The supply
voltage for the electronics is taken from the DC bus. The
Braking Module works autonomously from the drive control.
During operation, the DC bus energy is converted to heat in
a matching external braking resistor which is supplied as a
loose component for external mounting by others.
Each braking module requires a matching braking resistor.
The maximum permissible cable length between the Braking
Module and braking resistor is 330 ft (100 m). The braking
resistor is monitored on the basis of the duty cycle. A
temperature switch (NC contact) is also fitted. This responds
when the maximum permissible temperature is exceeded and
can be evaluated by a controller.
Several Braking Modules can be operated in parallel, but a
separate braking resistor must be connected to each
Braking Module.
The activation threshold voltage of the Braking Module can be
adjusted by means of a DIP switch. The braking power values
specified in the technical specifications apply to the upper
activation threshold.
4/26
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
For additional information, please refer to the Description
of the Options (L61, L62, L64, L65), or the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Braking Modules (Chassis Mounted)
Technical data
Braking Module and Braking Resistor
Option code
L61
L62
L64
L65
L61
L62
Motor or Line Modules frame size
FX/FB
GX/GB, HX, JX
FX/FB
GX/GB, HX, JX
FX/FB
GX/GB, HX, JX
Line voltage
DC bus voltage
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
510 … 720 V DC
500 … 600 V 3 ph. AC
675 … 900 V DC
660 … 690 V 3 ph. AC
890 … 1,035 V DC
Braking Module
Rated power
• Rated power P DB
kW
25
50
25
50
25
50
• Peak power P 15
kW
125
250
125
250
125
250
• Power P 20
kW
100
200
100
200
100
200
• Power P 40
kW
50
100
50
100
50
100
Activation thresholds
(adjustable via DIP switch)
V
774 (factory setting)
or 673
967 (factory setting)
or 841
1,153 (factory setting)
or 1,070
M8 nut
M8 nut
M8 nut
M8 nut
M8 nut
M8 nut
#2 AWG
#1 AWG
#2 AWG
#1 AWG
#2 AWG
#1 AWG
4.4 (± 7.5 %)
2.2 (± 7.5 %)
6.8 (± 7.5 %)
3.4 (± 7.5 %)
9.8 (± 7.5 %)
4.9 (± 7.5 %)
Resistor Connection
• Max. wire size
AWG/MCM
4
Braking Resistor
Resistance
Rated power
• Rated power P DB
(continuous)
kW
25
50
25
50
25
50
• Peak power P 15
(maximum)
kW
125
250
125
250
125
250
• Power P 20
kW
100
200
100
200
100
200
• Power P 40
kW
50
100
50
100
50
100
Current, max.
A
189
378
153
305
125
255
Power connection
M10 stud
M10 stud
M10 stud
M10 stud
M10 stud
M10 stud
Enclosure
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 inch [mm]
29 [740]
32 [810]
29 [740]
32 [810]
29 [740]
32 [810]
• Height
inch [mm]
24 [600]
52 [1,325]
24 [600]
52 [1,325]
24 [600]
52 [1,325]
• Depth
inch [mm]
19 [486]
19 [486]
19 [486]
19 [486]
19 [486]
19 [486]
Weight, approx.
lb [kg]
110 [50]
265 [120]
110 [50]
265 [120]
110 [50]
265 [120]
Enclosure dimensions,
nominal
• Width
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/27
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules used as Braking Modules
Overview
Note that for Motor Modules operating as Braking Modules
the response time at about 4 to 5 ms is approximately twice
as long as of the smaller Braking Modules designed for
mounting in chassis (and of the Central Braking Modules offered in the IEC product spectrum of SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules). For applications that require a very fast
braking response time it may therefore be necessary to combine both types of Braking Modules in one system. Please consult the factory when engineering such an
application.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Common
DC Bus
4
Motor
Module
For applications requiring high or very high braking powers, Motor Modules in Chassis format can be configured
as 3-phase Braking Modules.
When used as a braking module, three identical braking BrakinginModules
(Chassis
Mounted)
resistors
a wye connection
are connected
to the output of the Motor Module instead of a motor. These resistors form
a symmetrical resistive load. Three individual resistors in
separate enclosures or a symmetrical 3-phase resistor in one enclosure may be used. (It is not permissible to use asymmetrical or single phase resistor arrangements).
SINAMICS S120 firmware (Version 4.4 and up) includes
standard functionality to parameterize a motor module
for operation with a braking resistor. Settings include the
resistance of the braking resistor, the activation threshold
voltage and the output voltage.
Motor
Module
used as
Braking
Module
External
Braking
Resistor
3* R BR
M
3
Due to the large range of braking powers and as Braking Resistors at high and very high powers generally require
special designs (for example, outdoor installation or water cooling), such resistors are not offered as standard
components in this catalog. Please consult with specialized
resistor manufacturers to select suitable components.
Design
The permissible output currents for application as Braking
Modules (rated continuous I rated-Brake , and maximum Imax-Brake braking current) is provided on the following page.
These values are based on the upper response thresholds,
(i.e. to VDC-max = 774 V at line supply voltages of 380 V
to 480 V and to VDC-max = 967 V (1158 V) at line supply
voltages of 500 V to 600 (690) V. For other response
thresholds, the braking power must be reduced in proportion
to VDC-Brake.
The braking power P Brake of a Motor Module operating as a Braking Module is proportional to the DC bus voltage during braking. This response threshold VDC-Brake can be
freely selected, but should be limited to the range specified in the table below for the relevant line connection voltage.
4/28
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Line voltage
Threshold voltage range
VDC-Brake
380 … 480 V 3 ph. AC
673 … 774 V
500 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC
841 … 967 V (1,070 … 1,158 V)
The minimum cable length to the braking resistors is 33 ft.
(10 m). If shorter cables are used, the motor module requires
a motor reactor (option L08).
The maximum cable length is 980 ft (300 m) with shielded
cables and 1,480 ft (450 m) with unshielded cables, corresponding to the maximum cable lengths for Motor Modules used for their standard purpose.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Motor Modules used as Braking Modules
Technical data
Braking power ratings below are provided as a guide only. Please refer to the SINAMICS Engineering Manual for additional
information and details of calculations. Values are also dependant on the characteristics of braking resistors selected (such as
tolerances and increase of resistance under load).
Motor Module chassis
format
Rated output
current
(used as motor
module)
IN
Motor Module used as Braking Module
Continuous
braking
current
I rated-Brake
Maximum
braking
current
I max-Brake
Continuous
braking
power
P rated-Brake1)
Peak
braking
power
P max-Brake1)
Order No.
[A]
[A]
[A]
[kW]
[kW]
Minimum
braking
resistance
R BR-min 2)
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 510 … 650 V DC)
6SL3720-1TE32-1AU3
210
210
307
197
288
1.02
6SL3720-1TE32-6AU3
260
255
368
239
345
0.85
6SL3720-1TE33-1AU3
310
290
424
272
398
0.74
6SL3720-1TE33-8AU3
380
340
497
319
466
0.63
6SL3720-1TE35-0AU3
490
450
657
422
617
0.48
6SL3720-1TE36-1AU3
605
545
797
511
748
0.39
6SL3720-1TE37-5AU3
745
680
993
638
932
0.32
6SL3720-1TE38-4AU3
840
800
1,171
751
1,099
0.27
6SL3720-1TE41-0AU3
985
900
1,316
845
1,235
0.24
6SL3720-1TE41-2AU3
1,260
1,215
1,779
1,140
1,669
0.18
6SL3720-1TE41-4AU3
1,405
1,365
1,996
1,281
1,873
0.16
4
Line voltage 500 … 600 (690) V 3ph. AC (DC bus voltage 675 … 810 (930) V DC)
6SL3720-1TG28-5AU3
85
85
120
99 (119)
140 (168)
3.26 (3.90)
6SL3720-1TG31-0AU3
100
100
142
117 (140)
166 (199)
2.75 (3.30)
6SL3720-1TG31-2AU3
120
115
165
134 (161)
194 (232)
2.37 (2.84)
6SL3720-1TG31-5AU3
150
144
204
168 (202)
239 (286)
1.92 (2.29)
6SL3720-1TG31-8AU3
175
175
255
205 (246)
299 (358)
1.53 (1.84)
6SL3720-1TG32-2AU3
215
215
312
252 (302)
366 (438)
1.25 (1.50)
6SL3720-1TG32-6AU3
260
255
368
299 (358)
432 (517)
1.06 (1.27)
6SL3720-1TG33-3AU3
330
290
422
340 (407)
494 (592)
0.93 (1.11)
6SL3720-1TG34-1AU3
410
400
585
469 (562)
686 (821)
0.67 (0.80)
6SL3720-1TG34-7AU3
465
450
656
528 (632)
769 (921)
0.60 (0.71)
6SL3720-1TG35-8AU3
575
515
752
604 (723)
882 (1,056)
0.52 (0.62)
6SL3720-1TG37-4AU3
735
680
985
797 (955)
1,155 (1,383)
0.40 (0.48)
6SL3720-1TG38-1AU3
810
805
1,178
944 (1,130)
1,381 (1,654)
0.33 (0.40)
6SL3720-1TG38-8AU3
910
905
1,313
1,061 (1,271)
1,539 (1,843)
0.30 (0.36)
6SL3720-1TG41-0AU3
1,025
1,020
1,493
1,196 (1,432)
1,750 (2,096)
0.26 (0.31)
6SL3720-1TG41-3AU3
1,270
1,230
1,787
1,442 (1,727)
2,095 (2,509)
0.22 (0.26)
1) Power at upper (maximum) response threshold voltage: For line voltage 380 … 480 V = 774 V, for 500 … 600 (690) V = 967 (1,158) V.
Power ratings reduce for lower threshold setting.
2) Minimum braking resistance (cold state) per phase (i.e. per resistor, using three resistors in wye connection).
Calculations must make allowance for the increase in resistance under load (up to approx. 30%).
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
4/29
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Notes
4
4/30
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Modules,5Options
5
5/2
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Overview
Design
Selection and ordering data
Block diagram
Technical data
Options
5/6
Custom Cabinet Modules
Custom options
Custom Cabinet Modules
Custom Cabinet Module line-ups
Empty Cabinet Modules
5/8
Integration Engineering
Overview
Selection and ordering data
Options
5/9
Description of Options
Communication & control options +G.., +K..
Electrical options +L..
Mechanical options +M..
Other options +P.., +U.., +Y..
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Overview
Overview
Design
The Auxiliary Power Supply Module is supplied from the same
voltage level as the main power supply to the line-up..
The standard version contains the following components:
•Circuit breaker disconnect with auxiliary contacts for
external monitoring
•Transformer with 230 V output voltage
•SITOP 24 V DC power supply
•Ground bus, including jumper for looping through to the next Cabinet Module
•The module outputs three fused auxiliary voltages:
- 24 V DC for the electronics power supply
- 230 V 1 phase AC to supply 230 V loads
- 380 V to 690 V 1 phase AC to supply the equipment fans
The auxiliary voltages are distributed throughout the line-up
via the pre-wired 6-pole auxiliary power supply system, which
includes plug connections for looping through from one Cabinet Module to the next.
5
Selection and ordering data
An Auxiliary Power Supply Module is a convenient central
source of the entire auxiliary and control power supplies (line
voltage, 240 V 1 ph. AC and 24 V DC) for a SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Module line-up. It is generally supplied by a feeder
separate from the main feeder(s) to the Line Connection
Module(s) of the line up.
Equipment connected to the auxiliary power supply system
includes the fans of the SINAMICS S120 power modules, and
the control equipment. Since it is fed from a source separate
from the main supply, 24 V DC power can be provided to
the control electronics even if the DC bus is not charged, for
example to maintain PROFIBUS or PROFINET communication.
Alternatives to Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
An Auxiliary Power Supply Module is not essential; there are
various alternative methods of providing auxiliary power to a line-up:
•External auxiliary and control power provided by the
customer, for example from an MCC and/or UPS
•For smaller line-ups, it may be possible to include the auxiliary power supplies in the Line Connection Module
(by selecting option code K76)
•Another alternative is to include only the source of auxiliary power for the cooling fans in the Line Connection Module (option code K70). The 230 V AC and 24 V DC control supplies would then be provided from an external source, for example from a secure supply with batteries
5/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Line side supply current rating
(380 … 600 (690) V 3 phase AC)
Single Motor Module
Booksize Cabinet Kit
A
Order No.
125
6SL3700-0MX14-0AU3
160
6SL3700-0MX16-3AU3
200
6SL3700-0MX21-0AU3
250
6SL3700-0MX21-4AU3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Block diagram
Cabinet Module
Auxiliary
Power Supply
Module
-Q1
-Q4
-X45
1
2
3
4
L1
L2
L3
-Q3
-Q2
-T2
-X47
1
2
3
4
5
11
12
13
Fuse
monitoring
14
15
16
17
18
~
=
230 V AC
24 V DC
G_D213_EN_00067b
380 - 480 V 1 ph. AC
or 500 - 600 (690) V 1 ph. AC
-F24
Auxiliary power supply:
-X101
1 2 3 4 5 6
Block diagram, Auxiliary Power Supply Module
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Technical data
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
6SL37000MX14-0AU3
6SL37000MX16-3AU3
6SL37000MX21-0AU3
6SL37000MX21-4AU3
A
125
160
200
250
AWG/MCM
300 MCM
300 MCM
300 MCM
300 MCM
- to auxiliary power supply
A
63
80
100
100
- to customer terminal -X45
A
50
63
80
80
- to auxiliary power supply
A
6
10
10
20
- to customer terminal -X45
A
8
10
10
20
- to auxiliary power supply
A
20
40
80
80
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) per UL508A
kA
100
100
100
100
• Connection -X45
AWG/MCM
#6 AWG
#6 AWG
#6 AWG
#6 AWG
• Connection -X47
AWG/MCM
#14 AWG
#14 AWG
#14 AWG
#14 AWG
Cooling air requirement
cfm
N/A - Natural
convection
N/A - Natural
convection
N/A - Natural
convection
N/A - Natural
convection
Ground (PE) connection
Ground bus
Ground bus
Ground bus
Ground bus
Enclosure (base design)
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
inch [mm]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
Line supply current rating
(380 … 600 (690) V 3 ph. AC)
Line side power connection
• Wire size, max.
Current carrying capacity, max.
• Load connection 380 ... 690 V AC
• Load connection 230 V 1 ph. AC
5
• Load connection 24 V DC
Wire size, max.
Enclosure dimensions
• Width
1)
inch [mm]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
87 [2,200]
• Depth
inch [mm]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
24 [600]
Weight approx.
lb [kg]
375 [170]
400 [180]
465 [210]
530 [240]
• Height
1) The enclosure height increases by 10” (250 mm) for NEMA 1 (IP21)and by 16” (400 mm) for NEMA 1 filtered (IP23), IP43 and NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosure.
5/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Options
The table below lists the available options for Motor Modules chassis format (refer to Description of the Options for details).
Booksize Base Cabinets
Available Options
Option
code
Enclosure space heater
L55
Base (plinth) 100mm
M06
Base (plinth) 200mm (cable marshalling space)
M07
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP21)
M21
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) [includes M60]
M23
Side panel (right)
M26
Side panel (left)
M27
Enclosure IP43 [includes M60]
M43
Enclosure NEMA 12 (ventilated) (IP54) [includes M60]
M54
Solid cabinet door (no ventilation openings, air inlet through floor)
M59
EMC shield bus (for connecting cable screens)
M70
DC busbar system (Id = 1,170 A, 1x 60 x 10 mm)
M80
DC busbar system (Id = 1,500 A, 1x 80 x 10 mm)
M81
DC busbar system (Id = 1,840 A, 1x 100 x 10 mm)
M82
DC busbar system (Id = 2,150 A, 2x 60 x 10 mm)
M83
DC busbar system (Id = 2,730 A, 2x 80 x 10 mm)
M84
DC busbar system (Id = 3,320 A, 2x 100 x 10 mm)
M85
DC busbar system (Id = 3,720 A, 3x 80 x 10 mm)
M86
DC busbar system (Id = 4,480 A, 3x 100 x 10 mm)
M87
Lifting beam/eye bolts
M90
UL listing per UL508A [requires M23, M43 or M54]
U90
cUL listing per UL508A for Canada
[requires M23, M43 or M54, plus T58]
U91
Special enclosure paint color [specify color]
Y09
Assembly into transport sections [specify sections]
Y11
1-line label for customer text, 40 x 80 mm [specify text]
Y31
2-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y32
4-line label for customer text, 40 x 180 mm [specify text]
Y33
Customer drawings in dxf format
D02
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
D14
Documentation English/French
D58
Nameplate English/French
T58
Visual Inspection by customer
F03
Witnessed or observed function test without motor
F71
Witnessed or observed test incl. high-voltage and insulation test
F77
Customer specific test (on request)
F97
5
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
Options
Option combination matrix for Auxiliary Power Supply Modules
The following tables provide an overview of possible and impermissible combinations of standard options. Please refer to the
descriptions of options for more information. Custom configurations may be possible to provide combinations not available
as standard – please contact the factory.
Combination is possible
– Combination is not possible
Mechanical Options
M06
M07
M07
M21
M23
M54
M59
M60
M90
Y11
U90
U91
–
–
–
–
–
–
M21
5
M43
–
M06
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M23
–
M43
–
–
M54
–
–
–
–
–
–
M59
M60
–
–
M90
–
Y11
U90
–
–
U91
–
–
–
–
DC busbar system Options
Within a line-up, all DC bus needs to be of the same width (60, 80 or 100 mm). DC bus current ratings may vary within a
line-up by using either a single busbar, or two or three busbars in parallel per pole.
The following table indicates which busbar options for the various cabinet modules may be combined within a line-up.
M80
M81
M82
–
–
M80
M81
–
M82
–
–
–
–
M83
M84
–
M85
–
M86
–
M87
–
M83
–
–
–
Y31
Y31
Y32
–
Y33
–
5/6
Y32
Y33
–
–
–
–
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M87
–
–
–
–
Label Options
M86
–
–
–
–
M85
–
–
–
–
M84
–
–
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Custom Cabinet Modules
Customization of Cabinet Modules
Standard Cabinet Modules with their extensive range of standard options cover a broad range of applications and
designs, but there are invariably additional demands to meet project, site or application specific needs. Siemens offers a
range of approaches to address such needs, which includes:
Custom Options
Custom options are modifications to standard Cabinet Modules and may include, for example:
• Top cable entry for motor cables:
Depending on the frame size and rating of the Motor Module, and the installed options, connections for top entry of motor cables can sometimes be installed inside
the standard cabinet, sometimes an additional cabinet may be required.
• DC bus transition for back-to-back arrangement of
Cabinet Modules:
A range of DC bus transition designs has been supplied,
to best match specific designs and site layouts. Transition connection can be provided in the middle or at the ends of a line-up, sometimes inside existing cabinet modules, sometimes using additional cabinets, or even inside a box bolted to the line-up.
• Additional control or power components
These may include items such as I/O modules for digital
and/or analog inputs and outputs, or feeders for motor blower circuits.
Custom Cabinet Modules
Custom Cabinet Modules for both power and control circuits
are designed, built and tested in the factory. For instance:
• Contactor and switching Modules
A Motor Module may be switched to various motors, for example processes powered by specific motors run at
different times, or if individual motors are only briefly used during the day, then costs and space can be saved by using just one inverter with output switches. One such application is pump drives on tankers where various compartments in the ship are emptied one after the other. Another application involves container cranes, where a single
inverter may feed motors for hoisting and for the boom.
• Motor Protection Panel (MPP) Modules
Applications such as roller tables in the metals industry
may have multiple small motors running on a single
Motor Module (group drives). Motor Protection Panels include control and protection devices for, and cable
connections for power distribution to multiple motors
connected to a common Motor Module.
• Control Unit Cabinet Modules
There are standard options for including control units and encoder modules in the Motor Modules. However, the
preference may be to install this control equipment in a central control cabinet that does not contain any power
circuits and dangerous voltages associated with them. Such an arrangement is easily implemented due to the great flexibility provided by the DRIVE-CLiQ topology of SINAMICS S120.
Custom Cabinet Module line-ups
It is also possible to provide completely custom line-ups, that
would include design elements of the standard Cabinet Module range where advantageous.
• SINAMICS S120 Liquid Cooled line-ups
For adverse environments SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules can also be supplied in a liquid cooled version. The heat loss of the units is transferred to the cooling liquid and dissipated remotely, eliminating the need for air
conditioning of an electrical room. Such line-ups include liquid-cooled Line and Motor Modules in the chassis format, combined with a cooling unit appropriately designed for the specific conditions.
Empty Cabinet Modules
Siemens customers and partners may wish to combine the
advantages of predesigned, system tested high power standard Cabinet Modules with custom automation or control
equipment of their own design, integrated into one single
line-up. Siemens can provide empty Cabinet Modules for this purpose:
• Empty Cabinet Modules
Empty Cabinet Modules (without DC bus) would be located at one end of a line-up. These could be fitted with the
auxiliary power distribution system used in the rest of the line up, or a back panel, if required.
• Empty Cabinet Modules with DC bus.
If a Cabinet Module is located in the middle of a line-up it would require the DC bus to run through it. The bus could be shrouded to isolate the interior of the cabinet from the power circuits. Alternatively, if additional equipment is to be connected to the common DC bus, Siemens can
provide a fused DC feed. This is strongly recommended to ensure the integrity and short circuit protection of the
complete system.
In short, the possibilities of the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet
Modules are endless. Please contact your local Siemens sales
office to discuss your specific needs or obtain an offer.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/7
5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Integration Engineering
Overview
Selection and ordering data
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are all specified individually, based on an order number and associated option
codes. Drawings and documentation (outline dimension and
layout drawing, schematic, spare parts list) are provided for
each individual Cabinet Module.
The following standard engineering services can be ordered
depending on the number of drives/axes included in an order.
With option Y11 Cabinet Modules are grouped into transport
sections. This is only a mechanical connection, the drawings
are not affected.
5
As a default there is however no documentation for the
complete line-up showing interconnections between Cabinet
Modules. The reason is that the factory cannot deduce how
the various cabinet modules are intended to function, based
on the individual part no.’s. For example, there may be a
number of Motor Modules with only some including a control
unit, which could be connected in many different ways. One
control unit could be used to control a number of power
modules, each for a different motor or some power modules
could be intended for parallel connection. And there is no
way to tell which control unit is to be connected to which
power module(s).
Integration Engineering
Order No.
For 1 drive
(also parallel connection) including
the associated Line Modules, Sensor
Modules, Terminal Modules etc.
6SL3780-0AA00-0AU0
For up to 3 drives
(also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc.
6SL3780-0AC00-0AU0
For up to 5 drives
(also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc.
6SL3780-0AE00-0AU0
For up to 10 drives
(also parallel connection) including the associated Line Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules etc.
6SL3780-0AJ00-0AU0
“Integration Engineering” to integrate the individual cabinet
modules into one functioning line-up can be provided, based
on a detailed customer specification.
Engineering services for larger drive systems is also available
on request.
The scope of delivery of the integration engineering is as
follows:
• Checking the combinations and options ordered, in relation to the device configurations.
• Defining how the individual drive objects are to be
connected, coordinated with the customer as necessary.
• Checking the performance of the ordered CompactFlash card.
• Installing the required DRIVE-CLiQ cables within the
transport sections. Cables between the transport sections are connected at one end.
• Higher-level documentation of the scope of delivery (outline dimension diagram of the line-up, schematics with interconnections, consolidated spare parts list).
• Consolidation of the individual drawings, possibly shipping these to a delivery address different to that of the equipment.
• Customer-specific system and location designations,
coordinated with the customer/client.
Options
Note that in this context “Integration Engineering” is
limited only to integrating individual Cabinet Modules
into a line-up. This is not to be confused with integration
of the drive line-up into the customer’s plant and
interconnection to external equipment such as power
supplies, motors and process control or automation
equipment, which is outside the scope of supply of a
Cabinet Module line-up!
5/8
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
The table below lists the options available for the order specific Integration Engineering (For details see Description of the options):
Available Options
Option
code
Customer drawings in dxf format
D02
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
D14
Documentation English/French
D58
When ordering Integration Engineering, the required documentation options should always be ordered together with the Integration Engineering (not to the
individual Cabinet Modules).
Specifying the documentation options for individual Cabinet
Modules is only required if equipment is ordered without
Integration Engineering.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
Standard documentation
• Customer drawings supplied with SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules are provided for each cabinet individually (unless Integration Engineering is ordered to provide system drawings) and are always job specific (showing the configuration actually supplied, options not provided are not shown).
• All customer documentation is provided in electronic format on a CD, which ships inside the drive. All documents are in pdf format (Adobe Acrobat) and are supplied in
English with a copy in Spanish (English/Spanish are the default languages for NEMA version Cabinet Modules with order number ending in “U3”. English/French is alternatively available by specifying option D58). In addition, a paper copy of the Safety and Transportation Guidelines and the Installation Check List are included too.
D02
Customer drawings in dxf format
F03, F71, F75, F77, F97
Witnessed (or observed) testing
Order
Description
F03
Visual
inspection
by customer
The scope of the inspection comprises:
• Checking the enclosure type
• Checking the equipment (components)
• Checking the equipment identifiers
• Checking the clearance and
creepage distances
• Checking the wires
• Checking the customer
documentation
• Submitting the acceptance report
• The checks are carried out with the
drive deenergized
F71
Witnessed
function test
of drive
without motor The scope of the witnessed test comprises:
• Visual inspection as per option F03
• Check of power supply
• Check of protective and monitoring
devices (simulation)
• Check of fans
• Precharging test
• Functional test without connected motor
• Submitting the acceptance report
After the visual inspection with the drive
switched off, the drive is connected to
rated voltage. No current flows at the
drive output.
F77
Witnessed
test incl. highvoltage and
insulation test
The scope of the acceptance comprises:
• High-voltage test
• Measurement of insulation resistance
F97
Witnessed
customer
specific drive
acceptance
inspections/
tests
(on request)
If additional witnessed testing is desired
over and above options F03 or F71,
please provide a specification/ test plan
for the factory to submit a quotation.
Schematics, outline dimension and layout drawings will be
provided in AutoCAD (dxf) on the CD (or as specified by other
option codes).
D14
Advance copy of customer documentation (pdf)
To receive a copy of customer drawings earlier than with
drive shipment, i.e. after order placement (typically within 2
weeks). If option code D02 is specified, the advance copy of
the drawings will be supplied in dxf format too.
D58
Documentation English/French
Two copies of the documentation (drawings and manuals) will be provided on the CD (or as specified by other option
codes), one in English and the other in French.
code
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/9
5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
G20
CBC10 Communication Board CANopen
The CBC10 communication board is used to interface the
CU320-2 Control Unit of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module
to the CAN (Controller Area Network) protocol. The board’s
driver software fulfills the standards of the following
CANopen specification of the CiA organization (CAN in
Automation):
• Communication profiles in accordance with DS 301
• Drive profile in accordance with DSP 402 (in this case Profile Velocity Mode)
• EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) in accordance with DSP 306
• Operating status signaling in accordance with DSP 305
5
Temperature values from the TM150 are available for further
processing and for transmission to the process control system
via bus communications.
Note: TM150 inputs are not electrically isolated. Only
temperature sensors isolated per IEC 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals “+Temp” and “-Temp”. Failure to observe these instructions can result in electric shock! G56
Monitoring of precharge function
This option provides for the drive controller to monitor the
precharge function of Line Modules, as well as on Motor
Modules in combination with option L37 (DC disconnect with
precharge). If precharge is not completed in a preset time the
precharge circuit is opened and a fault is signalled.
The CBC10 Communication Board plugs into the option
slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit. The CAN interface on the
CBC10 has 2 SUB-D connections for input and output.
K01 to K05
Safety license for 1 to 5 axes
The CBC10 Communication Board can only be ordered in
conjunction with a CU320-2 Control Unit (option K90 or K95).
Note the CU320-2 has only one options slot for one
communications or I/O module.
Safety Integrated Basic Functions (STO, SS1, SBA) do not
require a license. A license is, however, required for each axis
using Safety Integrated Extended Functions. It is irrelevant
which safety functions are used and how many.
G33
CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet
Option K01 includes the license for 1 axis, K02 for 2 axes, etc.
up to option K05 for 5 axes.
The CBE20 communication board connects the CU320-2
DP or CU320-2 PN Control Unit of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet
Module to an additional communications bus. The CBE20 can
be parameterized to connect to either:
• SINAMICS Link high speed peer-to-peer communications with other CBE20 modules plugged into the CU320-2
control units of other SINAMICS drives, up to 64 nodes.
• PROFINET I/O network, 100 Mbit/s full-duplex, supports real-time classes RT (Real-Time) and IRT (Isochronous
Real-Time). (Only one communication interface can be used in isochronous operation when operating the CBE20 in a CU320-2 DP or PN Control Unit).
• EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol) is an open standard predominantly used in the automation industry. EtherNet/IP is supported by the Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association (ODVA).
The safety licenses can be optionally ordered retrospectively
and loaded to the CompactFlash card. A license key can be
generated via the WEB License Manager at:
www.siemens.com/automation/license
In addition, the CBE allows on a PROFINET or EtherNet/Inetwork:
• Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication for engineering
processes using the STARTER commissioning tool
The CBE20 Communication Board plugs into the option slot
on the CU320-2 Control Unit. It has 4x RJ45 Ethernet ports.
Description of the CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet
Chapter 6.
G51 to G54
TM150 RTD Monitoring Module(s)
Up to four TM150 may be mounted in a Line Connection
Module: G51 = qty. 1x TM150, G52 = qty. 2x TM150, G53 =
qty. 3x TM150, G54 = qty. 4x TM150.
The TM150 RTD module is suitable for monitoring temperature
sensors type Pt100 or Pt1000 (Platinum RTD 100 ohm or
1,000 ohm), KTY84, PTC thermistor or a temperature switch
contact (NC). Up to 12 sensors in 2-wire connection or up to
6 sensors in 3- or 4-wire connection can be connected to one
TM150.
5/10
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
K08
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel, door mounted
The AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel is an optional door
mounted local user interface for a Cabinet Module. The
AOP30 connects to a CU320-2 control unit via a serial link
(RS232). Only one AOP30 can be connected to one CU320-2.
Description of the AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel 
Chapter 6.
K46
SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted connects to a resolver to simultaneously sense the speed and the rotor position angle of a motor, and make this information available to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• 2-pole resolver
• Multi-pole resolver
The motor temperature can also be detected using
KTY84-130 or PTC thermistors.
Description of the SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
 Chapter 6.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
K48
SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted connects to an
incremental encoder to simultaneously sense the speed and
the rotor position angle of a motor, and make this information
available to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 VPP
• EnDat absolute encoder
• SSI encoder with incremental signals sin/cos 1 VPP
(firmware version 2.4 and later)
The motor temperature can also be detected using KTY84-130
or PTC thermistors.
Description of the SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
Chapter 6. K50
SMC30 Sensor Module for speed feedback
The SMC30 sensor module is used to connect a speed feedback incremental encoder to the drive, and provide the actual
speed signal to the regulator via the DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• Incremental encoders TTL/HTL with/without open-circuit detection (open-circuit detection is only available with
bipolar signals)
• SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals
• SSI encoder without incremental signals
The motor temperature can also be detected using a
KTY84-130 sensor or PTC thermistors.
Description of the SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
Panel Chapter 6.
K51
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module reads the voltage
waveform at the drive output. This provides the flying restart
function when the SINAMICS S120 drive is connected to a
permanent magnet synchronous machine without encoder.
Description of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
Chapter 6.
K52
Additional SMC30 Sensor Module
This option code is to add a second SMC30 sensor module (in addition to one specified by option K50). Two SMC30 with
associated encoders are required for Safety Extended functions.
K70
Auxiliary AC voltage supply in the Line Connection
Module
Cabinet Modules require auxiliary and control power supplies.
The current demand for the various auxiliary voltages must
be determined when configuring the line-up and can be
supplied either from external sources, or from an Auxiliary
Power Supply Module.
Alternatively, for smaller line-ups option K70 provides only
the line voltage auxiliary supply in the Line Connection Module to power mostly fans (230 V AC and 24 V DC will
need to be provided from external sources). This arrangement
allows the control system to operate independently even if
the main power source for the line-up is disconnected).
Option K70, provides the following auxiliary supplies:
• Line voltage 380 V to 480 V or 500 V to 600 (690) V 1
phase AC (approx. 80 A)
The auxiliary AC voltage supplies in the Line Connection
Module connect to the auxiliary power supply system, from
where they are distributed to the rest of the line-up.
K76
Auxiliary AC & DC voltage supplies in the Line Connection
Module
Similar to option K70 above, option K76 provides both AC and DC auxiliary supplies in the Line Connection Module, as follows:
• Line voltage 380 V to 480 V or 500 V to 600 (690) V 1
phase AC (approx. 80 A)
• 230 V 1 phase AC (Line Connection Modules < 800 A:
approx. 4 A, > 800 A: approx. 6 A)
• 24 V DC (Line Connection Modules < 800 A: approx. 20 A, > 800 A: approx. 40 A)
The auxiliary voltage supplies in the Line Connection Module
connect to the auxiliary power supply system, from where
they are distributed to the rest of the line-up.
K82
Terminal interface for controlling the “Safe Torque Off”
and “Safe Stop 1” safety functions
This terminal interface offers a wide voltage range (24 V to 240 V DC or AC) for easy integration of the following
Safety Integrated basic functions into the plant controls
(terminology as defined in draft IEC 61800-5-2):
• Safe Torque Off (STO)
• Safe Stop 1 (SS1) (time-controlled)
The integrated safety functions, starting from the Safety Integrated (SI) input terminals of the components (Control
Unit and Motor Module), satisfy the requirements of IEC
61800-5-2, IEC 60204-1, ISO 13849-1 Category 3 (previously
EN 954-1) for Performance Level (PL) d and IEC 61508 SIL 2.
With option K82, the requirements specified in IEC 61800-5-2,
IEC 60204-1, ISO 13849-1 Category 3 (previously EN 954-1)
for Performance Level (PL) d and IEC 61508 SIL 2 are fulfilled.
The Safety Integrated functions using option K82 are only
available in conjunction with certified components and
software versions.
These Safety Integrated functions of SINAMICS are
generally certified by independent institutes. An up-to-date
list of certified components is available on request from your
local Siemens office.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/11
5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
K87
TM54F Terminal Module
The TM54F Terminal Module provides fail safe digital inputs
and outputs for hardwired control of the Safety Integrated
extended functions (as opposed to control via bus
communications with PROFIsafe).
The TM54F must be connected directly to a Control Unit
via DRIVE-CLiQ. Each Control Unit is uniquely assigned to
one TM54F.
Note: It is not permissible to connect Motor Modules or Line
Modules to a TM54F.
The TM54F has 4 fail safe digital outputs and 10 fail safe
digital inputs. A fail-safe digital output consists of one 24 V
DC switching output, an output switching to ground and one
digital input to check the switching state. A fail-safe digital
input consists of two digital inputs.
K88
Safe Brake Adapter SBA, 230 V AC
5
Safe Brake Control (SBC) is a basic safety function that is used
in safety-relevant applications, for example in presses or
rolling mills. In the no-current state, the brake is applied to
the drive motor shaft using spring force. The brake is released
when current flows in it (low active).
The Safe Brake Adapter 230 V AC is factory installed in the
Cabinet Module. A source of power is connected to terminal
-X12 on the Safe Brake Adapter. For control, a connection is
established between the Safe Brake Adapter and the Control
Interface Module in the factory using a wire harness.
On the plant side, to control the brake, a connection must be
made between terminal -X14 on the Safe Brake Adapter and
the brake.
Note: The safe brake adapter is not yet UL listed. Option
K88 cannot be included in a UL listed line-up.
K90
CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) Control Unit
Option K90 assigns a CU320-2 DP Control Unit to a Line
Module or Motor Module. This control unit handles the
communications, regulator and control functions.
DRIVE-CLiQ is used to connect the CU320-2 to power
modules and, if applicable, to additional I/O and sensor
modules. The CU320-2 includes a PROFIBUS interface as
standard for higher level bus communications.
The full performance of the CU320-2 is only available on
systems with performance expansion (option K94).
Description of the CU320-2 Control Unit
Chapter 6.
K94
Performance expansion for CU320-2 Control Unit
Options K90 and K95 include standard SINAMICS S120 firmware (without performance expansion) suitable for controlling up to 3 axes. The performance required from the CU320-2 DP Control Unit can be calculated using SIZER
and is based on the number of connected Motor or Line Modules and system components, as well as the dynamic performance demanded.
5/12
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
With option K94, the CU320-2 Control Unit is provided with
a CompactFlash card with performance expansion, which
enables the full performance capabilities of the CU320-2
Control Unit to be utilized (control of up to 6 axes).
In addition to the firmware, the CompactFlash card also
contains licensing codes that are required to enable firmware
options, such as performance expansion and the Safety
Integrated Extended functions. (Additional licenses are
required to utilize Safety Integrated extended functions,
refer to option K01 to K05 above).
K95
CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) Control Unit
Option K95 assigns a CU320-2 PN Control Unit to a Line Module or Motor Module. This control unit handles the
communications, regulator and control functions. DRIVE-CLiQ
is used to connect the CU320-2 to power modules and, if
applicable, to additional I/O and sensor modules. The CU320-2
includes a PROFINET interface as standard for higher level
bus communications.
The full performance of the CU320-2 is only available on
systems with performance expansion (option K94).
Description of the CU320-2 Control Unit
Chapter 6.
L07
dV/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter
The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) limits
the voltage rate-of-rise dV/dt to values < 1600 V/µs, and the
typical voltage peaks to the following values per the limit
value curve A of IEC 60034-25, 2007:
• < 1150 V at ULine < 575 V
• < 1400 V at 660 V < ULine < 690 V
Note that these dV/dt and peak voltage values exceed the
allowable values for motors insulated to NEMA MG1 part
30. (The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL may be used with suitably insulated IEC motors. For motors insulated to NEMA
MG1 part 30, the dV/dt filter plus VPL (option L10) should to
be selected). The dV/dt filter compact plus VPL is designed for the following
maximum motor cable lengths:
• Shielded cables: 328 ft [100 m]
• Unshielded cables 492 ft [150 m]
For motor cables exceeding these lengths, the dV/dt filter plus
VPL (option L10) needs to be selected.
Note: Operation with output frequencies < 10 Hz is permissible
for max. 5 minutes.
Also refer to the appropriate notes in the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Note: Option L07 cannot be combined with the following
options:
• L08 (motor reactor)
• L10 (dV/dt filter plus VPL).
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
L08
Motor reactor
Motor reactors reduce the voltage load on the motor windings
by reducing the voltage gradients on the motor terminals
generated by the drive. At the same time, the capacitive
charge/discharge currents that place an additional load at the Motors Module output when long motor cables are used
are reduced.
Suitably dimensioned motor reactors or connecting several
motor reactors in series offers the possibility of dealing with
larger cable capacitances, therefore allowing longer motor
cable length to be connected.
In the case of multi motor drives, the use of motor reactors is
recommended as a general principle.
The motor reactor is accommodated in the Cabinet Module. A
supplementary cabinet 23.6 inch [600 mm] wide located to
the right of the Motor Module is only required for the chassis
format in frame sizes HX and JX.
For Motor Modules in the chassis format, the maximum
motor cable length with or without motor reactors is 980 ft
[300 m] (shielded) or 1,480 ft [450 m] (unshielded). Please
consult factory if longer motor cable lengths are required.
For Motor Modules in the Booksize Cabinet Kit format with
motor reactors (option L08), the maximum motor cable
lengths as specified in the table below can be reached:
L09
Two motor reactors in series
For Single Motor Modules in the Booksize Cabinet Kit format,
selecting option L09 provides two motor reactors in series,
which are accommodated within the standard width of the
Cabinet Kit.
The maximum permissible motor cable lengths with option
L09 are specified in the table below.
Note: The terminal lugs of the reactors are not nickel-plated.
Note: The terminal lugs of the reactors are not nickel-plated.
Booksize Cabinet Kit
Rated output
current of
motor module
5
Maximum motor cable length
for Booksize Cabinet Kit Motor Modules with output reactors
Shielded cable
Without
reactor
Unshielded cable
With one
reactor
(option L08)
With two
reactors
in series
(option L09)
Without
reactor
With one
reactor
(option L08)
With two
reactors
in series
(option L09)
Order No.
[A]
ft [m]
ft [m]
ft [m]
ft [m]
ft [m]
ft [m]
6SL3720-1TE21-0AB3
9
164 [50]
443 [135]
—
246 [75]
6\56 [200]
—
6SL3720-1TE21-8AB3
18
230 [70]
525 [160]
1,050 [320]
246 [75]
787 [240]
1,575 [480]
6SL3720-1TE23-0AB3
30
328 [100]
623 [190]
1,230 [375]
492 [150]
919 [280]
1,837 [560]
6SL3720-1TE24-5AB3
45
328 [100]
656 [200]
1,312 [400]
492 [150]
984 [300]
1,968 [600]
6SL3720-1TE26-0AB3
60
328 [100]
656 [200]
1,312 [400]
492 [150]
984 [300]
1,968 [600]
6SL3720-1TE28-5AB3
85
328 [100]
656 [200]
1,312 [400]
492 [150]
984 [300]
1,968 [600]
6SL3720-1TE31-3AB3
132
328 [100]
656 [200]
1,312 [400]
492 [150]
984 [300]
1,968 [600]
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/13
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
L10
dV/dt filter with VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter)
L13
Input contactor
The dV/dt filter plus VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) limits the
voltage rate-of-rise dV/dt to values < 500 V/ s, and the typical
voltage peaks to the following values according to the limit
value curve to IEC/TS 60034-17: 2006:
• < 1000 V at ULine < 575 V
• < 1250 V at 660 V < ULine < 690 V
Line Connection Modules up to 800A rated input current
include a manually operated molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) disconnect. The input contactor allows the drive to be
connected to or be disconnected from the input power supply
in response to an electrical control signal. This function is
also required to disconnect the line-up from the supply in the
event of an Emergency OFF (in this case it is controlled by the
drive regulator).
The dv/dt filter plus VPL functionally comprises two
components, the dv/dt reactor and the voltage limiting network VPL, which cuts off voltage peaks and feeds back the energy into the DC bus. Option L10 is installed in an additional cabinet with a width of 23.6 inch [600 mm] that is located on the right-hand side of the Motor Module.
A dv/dt filter plus VPL generally allows the use of standard
non-inverter duty motors with standard insulation and without insulated bearings for VFD operation.
5
For motors insulated per NEMA MG1, part 30 (voltage peaks
<1,000 V and dV/dt <500 V/ s) the maximum allowable motor
cable length is as follows. With longer cable lengths voltage
peaks may exceed 1,000 V.
Maximum motor cable length
for motors insulated per NEMA MG1, part 30
Rated voltage
Unshielded cable
Shielded cable
380 – 480 V
980’ (300 m)
980’ (300 m)
500 – 600 V
490’ (150 m)
490’ (150 m)
The dV/dt filter plus VPL is designed for the following maximum motor cable lengths:
• Shielded cables: 980 ft [300 m]
• Unshielded cables 1,480 ft [450 m]
When using dv/dt filters, restrictions regarding permissible
pulse and output frequencies must be observed.
Please refer to the appropriate notes in the SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
Note: Parts of option L10 do not have nickel-plated copper
busbars.
Option L10 cannot be combined with the following options:
• L07 (dv/dt filter compact plus VPL)
• L08 (motor reactor).
An input contactor option L13 is available for Line Connection
Modules with Basic Line Modules (option L43); for Smart Line
Modules and Active Line Modules, the contactor is already
included for the purpose of pre-charging.
L21
Line side surge arrestors for ungrounded supply systems
Three single phase surge arrestors are connected ahead of
the incoming circuit breaker disconnect.
L22
Without input line reactor
Basic Line Modules or Smart Line Modules are supplied as
standard with line reactors; the reason for this is that a line
reactor primarily assures the minimum current form factor,
protects the drive against excessive harmonic currents and
thus overloads, and improves the sensitivity of the VFD to
voltage spikes. An input line reactor is recommended for most installations.
If the drive is powered via a separate drive isolation transformer, or if the ratio between the line short circuit capacity at the point of connection and the rated drive output
is low (high network impedance), the input line reactor may
be omitted by selecting option L22.
Option L22 is available for Line Connection Modules (rated
current < 2000 A) in conjunction with Basic Line Modules (option L43), as well as for Smart Line Modules.
This option is not available for Basic or Smart Line Modules
connected in parallel to a single Line Connection Module as
line reactors are required to ensure current sharing.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
L25
Drawout circuit breaker
Line Connection Modules with an input current of > 800 A are equipped with a fixed mounted insulated case circuit
breakers as standard. If the customer requires a visible
isolating distance, a drawout circuit breaker can be ordered
as an option.
5/14
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
L34
Output circuit breaker
Comment: These current transformers are already included in
options P10 and P11 (power meter).
A circuit breaker is provided at the output of Motor Modules
chassis format, to disconnect the motor from the drive.
L42
Line Connection Module for Active Line Module
A permanent-magnet synchronous motor generates a voltage
at its motor terminals proportional to the speed, and in the
event of an overspeed a very high voltage can be applied to the output of the motor module which can damage to the inverter as well as the DC bus and other components connected to it.
Option L42 adds the relevant components (precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection Module
for connection to an Active Line Module. Also refer to the
descriptions in section 3.
The output circuit breaker option L34 is available to
disconnect the motor in the event of a fault or if maintenance
work is to be carried out. Option L34 is completely prewired
and is accommodated in an additional cabinet, which is
arranged to the right hand side of the Motor Module (16 “
[400 mm] wide for frame sizes FX/GX, 23.6” [600 mm] wide
for frame size HX/JX).
Option L43 adds the relevant components (line reactor,
precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection
Module for connection to a Basic Line Module. Also refer to
the descriptions in section 3.
The circuit breaker is automatically controlled by the Motor
Module. A TM31 Terminal Module is included with this option
to provide the associated inputs and outputs.
Option L34 cannot be combined with option L10 (dv/dt filter
plus Voltage Peak Limiter).
L37
DC disconnect including precharge circuit
If, for reasons relating to the process or availability, the
Motor Module needs to be disconnected from or connected
to the live DC bus during operation, a manually operated
disconnect switch can be ordered as Option L37. For
Motor Modules in the chassis format, this takes the form of
a mechanically operated disconnect switch, and for Booksize
Cabinet Kits an electrically operated contactor combination.
Option L37 is installed on the busbar between the Motor
Module and the main DC bus. To ensure that the motor
module can be connected to a live DC bus, the option also
includes a precharge circuit for the DC capacitors of the
relevant Motor Module.
The switching operation is performed externally. The operating levers are padlockable (padlock not included in
scope of delivery).
Option L37 also includes option M60 (additional touch
protection) for channeling the cooling air.
Options L61/L62 and L64/L65 (braking units) cannot be
ordered together with option L37 for space reasons.
Note: Option L37 is not yet UL listed and cannot be
included in a UL listed line-up.
L41
Current transformer upstream of main circuit breaker
If additional current transformers are required for measuring
or monitoring purposes, these can be ordered as option L41
for the Line Connection Modules. The current transformers
are installed upstream of the main circuit breaker in all three
infeed phases.
The transformers have an accuracy class of 1.0. The secondary
current is 5 A, maximum in a NEMA version Line Connection
Module (order number ending in U3).
The transformer measuring connections are routed to the
terminal block in the Line Connection Module.
L43
Line Connection Module for Basic Line Module
L44
Line Connection Module for Smart Line Module
Option L44 adds the relevant components (precharge connection, busbars etc.) in the Line Connection Module for connection to a Smart Line Module. Also refer to the descriptions in section 3.
L45
EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton, installed in the cabinet door
The twist-to-release, padlockable EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton
is door mounted in the Line Connection Module, with its
contacts wired to a terminal block. This option is provided for integration into the customer’s external EMERGENCY OFF circuit.
NOTE: This option is for a pushbutton only, it is not wired
into the drive circuit.
L55
Enclosure space heater
Space heaters are recommended at low ambient temperatures
and high levels of humidity to prevent condensation. One
100 W heater is provided for each Cabinet Module <32” (800
mm) wide. For cabinets exceeding this width, two heaters will
be installed. This option requires an external power source
(110 to 230 V 1 phase AC, fused for max. 16 A).
Option L55 cannot be combined with option K82 (Terminal
interface for controlling safety functions).
L61, L62, L64, L65
Braking units
Braking units may be required for drives in which motors
might operate in generator mode and the excess energy
cannot be absorbed by other loads or regenerated back
into the supply system, or braking is required if the supply
system fails.
The braking unit comprises two components:
• A Braking Module that can be installed in the air discharge of chassis format power units
• A braking resistor to be mounted externally (IP20 degree
of protection).
The braking unit functions as an autonomous unit, and does
not require an external power supply. During the braking
process, the kinetic energy is converted into heat in the
externally mounted braking resistor.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/15
5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
A cable length of max. 328 ft. (100 m) is permissible between
the Braking Module and the braking resistor. This allows the
braking resistor to be mounted externally so that heat losses
can be dissipated outside the drive enclosure. The braking
resistor is directly connected to the Braking Module.
For SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules the following braking
modules are available, depending on the frame size:
Option
5
For frame
size
Rated
power PDB
kW
125
250
Since the response philosophy to a ground fault may
differ, output relay contacts are not wired in the drive but are available for wiring to drive terminals or integration into a plant control system. Additional terminals on the device are
provided for an output to an external display, and inputs for
external reset and test buttons.
125
250
Note: Braking Module options cannot be combined with the
DC disconnect (option L37).
For additional information, please refer to the description of
Braking Modules in Section 4.
P/P20
G_D011_EN_00328
1.50
P20
0.75
P40
10 15 20 30
40
50
60
Enclosure with option M06
M07
Base (plinth) 8” (200mm) high
PDB
0.25
0
M06
Base (plinth) 4” (100mm) high
The 4” enclosure base allows larger bending radii for cables (cable entry
from below) and routing them
within the base. It is delivered
already mounted to the enclosure.
The height of the operator panel
changes accordingly.
The base is always colored RAL 7022 (umbra grey). A special color is not possible.
P15
0.50
An insulation monitor must be used if the drive is operated
on an ungrounded power supply. This device monitors the
complete electrically connected circuit for insulation (ground)
faults. Two threshold values of resistance to ground (between
1 k and 10 M can be set (for alarm and fault).
Note: Only one insulation monitor can be used in an electrically connected network.
PDB: Rated power (continuous braking power)
P20: 20 s power referred to a braking interval of 90 s
P15: 15 s power referred to a braking interval of 90 s
1.00
Line Connection Modules have a short circuit current rating
(SCCR) per UL508A supplement SB as shown in section 3. For
Line Connection Modules rated 1,000 A and up, a high SCCR
(84 or 100 kA) is optionally available by specifying option
code L70.
L87
Insulation Monitor for ungrounded supplies
Braking Module
Rated
Rated
power PDB
power PDB
kW
kW
380 … 480 V 3ph. AC (& 660… 690 V 3ph. AC)
FX
25
100
L61
L62
GX, HX, JX 50
200
500 … 600 V 3ph. AC
FX
25
100
L64
L65
GX, HX, JX 50
200
1.25
L70
High SCCR rating
70
80
90
100 s
t
PDB = Rated power
P15 = 5 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 15 s
P20 = 4 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 20 s
P40 = 2 x PDB = Power which is permissible every 90 s for 40 s
Load diagram for Braking Modules and braking resistors
Additional notes about possible duty cycles of the braking
resistors and other engineering notes are included in the
SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
The 8” enclosure base provides more space for bending and
routing cables. The base is delivered already mounted to the enclosure. The height of the operator panel changes accordingly.
The base color is the same as the enclosure, RAL 7035 (light
grey). If the enclosure is ordered in a special color (option
Y09), the 8” base is also painted the same color.
M21
Enclosure NEMA 1 (IP 21)
In the base IP20 enclosure air is exhausted upwards though
the top of the cabinet, which is covered by a metal grate. With
option M21 a raised roof is added to the cabinet, to provide
protection against falling dirt. The enclosure height increases
by approx. 10” (250 mm).
For transport reasons the raised roof and standoffs are
shipped as loose items and must be mounted on site.
5/16
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
M23
Enclosure NEMA 1 filtered (IP23)
M59
Closed cabinet doors, air inlet from below through floor
A tophat is added to the enclosure increasing its height by approx. 16” (400 mm). Louvers and foam air filters are added
to air inlet and outlet openings. Option M23 also includes option M60 (additional covers for touch safety).
If the Cabinet Modules are installed on a false floor or duct
which forms part of a forced ventilation system, the modules
can be ordered with closed doors (without ventilation openings). To ensure an adequate air inlet cross-section, the
units are shipped without the standard base plates. In this
case, the customer must ensure that dirt, dust or moisture
cannot enter the Cabinet Module. Cables must be routed in
such a way that they do not impede the flow of air through
the cabinet floor opening.
A NEMA 1 filtered (IP23) enclosure is the minimum required
for listing the enclosed drive per UL508A. For transport
reasons the tophat is shipped as a loose item and must be
mounted on site.
Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the
specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted.
M26
Side panel mounted on right
Cabinet Modules (respectively transport sections) are open
at both sides, for side-by-side installation with other cabinet
modules. With option M26, the cabinet is fitted with a side
panel (skin) on the right (when viewed from the front).
Note: Side panels on both sides of the line-up are necessary
to obtain the enclosure type/degree of protection specified.
M27
Side panel mounted on left
Cabinet Modules (respectively transport sections) are open
at both sides, for side-by-side installation with other cabinet
modules. With option M27, the cabinet is fitted with a side
panel (skin) on the left (when viewed from the front).
Note: Side panels on both sides of the line-up are necessary
to obtain the enclosure type/degree of protection specified.
M43
Enclosure IP43
Similar to NEMA 1 filtered (M23) with tophat and foam air
filters on air inlets and outlets, but additionally a 1mm wire
mesh is provided behind the air filters.
The tophat increases the base enclosure height by approx.
16” (400 mm).
Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the
specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted.
M54
Enclosure NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54)
Similar to NEMA 1 filtered (M23) with tophat and louvers but with fine paper air filters added to air inlet and outlet
openings, to prevent even fine dust particles from entering
the enclosure in very dusty environments.
These fine dust filters are a patented design for high volume
airflow with small derating. Please refer to Engineering Information section 6 for current derating with a NEMA 12
filtered enclosure.
Suitable touch protection must be provided if the area
beneath the Cabinet Modules can be accessed.
M60
Additional touch protection
With option M60, additional covers are installed for improved
touch protection of live parts, such as in the area of the AC
and DC busbars and in front of the power unit.
Option M60 is already included with Options M23, M43 and M54.
M70
EMC shield bus
The EMC shield bus is used for the connection of the shields
of cables on the line and motor sides. The supplied EMC
shield clamps provide a large surface area for the connection,
to ensure effective grounding also of high frequency noise.
M80 to M87
DC busbar system
The busbars for the common DC bus are located in the
upper section of the Cabinet Modules, and connect the Line Modules to the Motor Modules. They are nickel plated as standard and are available in different sizes for a range of current carrying capacities.
The common DC bus is dimensioned according to the load
requirements and demand factor associated with operation
of the individual drives, and according to the specific Cabinet
Module layout. For this reason the DC bus is not supplied as
standard, but must be specified as an option for each Cabinet
Module. Please also refer to section 2 – System configuration
guidelines.
When selecting the DC bus, it is important to ensure that the
bus sizes in adjacent Cabinet Modules are compatible with
each other (refer to the table below and option selection
matrix for the Cabinet Modules in question).
If Cabinet Modules are ordered in factory assembled transport
sections with option Y11, all Cabinet Modules in a transport
section must have identical busbars.
Note that it is mandatory for all Line Modules, Motor Modules
(Chassis format) and Booksize Base Cabinets to include a DC
bus option.
The tophat increases the base enclosure height by approx.
16” (400 mm).
Note the tophat will be supplied in the same color as the
specified for the enclosure. However, the molded plastic
louvers are colored RAL7035 and cannot be painted.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/17
5
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
Option
M80
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
M86
M87
5
Rated
current
of DC bus IN
A
1,170
1,500
1,840
2,150
2,730
3,320
3,720
4,480
Qty. of
parallel
busbars
per pole
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
Busbar size
[width]
mm
60 80
100 60
80
100
80
100
Compatible
with
option(s)
M83
M84 and M86
M85 and M87
M80
M81 and M86
M82 and M87
M81 and M84
M82 and M85
P11
Power Meter with PROFIBUS port
A power meter (Sentron PAC3200 or equivalent) is mounted
in the door of the Line Connection Module. The meter
displays measured and calculated values including voltages,
currents, power factor, THD, active, reactive and apparent
power etc. Current transformers (option L41) are included in
option P10.
The meter includes a PROFIBUS communications port for
transmitting data to a control system.
T58
Nameplate English/French
The scope of delivery also includes the jumpers required to
link the DC bus of a Cabinet Module to the adjacent one.
The standard nameplate text is in both English and Spanish.
This option provides for a nameplate with both English and
French text.
M90
Lifting beam/eye bolts
U90
UL listing per UL508A
For single cabinets up to a width of 24” (600 mm), eye bolts
are provided. For larger enclosures transportation beams
are provided.
This option needs to be selected for every Cabinet Module in
a drive line-up that is to be provided with a UL listing mark
per UL508A (when built in the US, UL file number E83449).
Once the drives are in position, the lifting hardware needs to
be removed to mount the raised roof or tophats.
When Cabinet Modules are ordered in factory assembled
transport sections (option Y11),the transportation beams are
automatically included and option M90 does not need to be
specified additionally.
UL listing mark
Note that Integration Engineering (see page 5/8) must be
ordered for a UL listed line-up.
Please refer to section 2 – UL listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for additional information.
U91
cUL listing for Canada per UL508A
Similar to option U90, this option needs to be selected for
every Cabinet Module in a drive line-up that is to be provided
with a cUL listing mark for Canada per UL508A (when built in
the US, UL file number E83449).
Note that Integration Engineering (see page 5/8) must be
ordered for a UL listed line-up.
SINAMICS drive on pallet with transportation beams
P10
Power Meter
A power meter (Socomec Diris A40 or equivalent) is mounted
in the door of the Line Connection Module. The meter
displays measured and calculated values including voltages,
currents, power factor, THD, active, reactive and apparent
power etc. Current transformers (option L41) are included in
option P10.
5/18
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Please refer to section 2 – UL listing of a SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Module line-up for additional information.
Y09
Special enclosure paint color (specify color)
The standard color of the drive enclosures is RAL 7035 (light grey). A special color must be specified in plain text
when ordering.
In general, colors available as powder coating can be ordered.
Please consult factory to confirm. The enclosure, tophats and,
if specified, 8” high plinths (option M07) will be supplied in
the specified special color.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Description of Options
Description of options
Note:
1.The molded plastic parts (e.g. louvers) are colored RAL 7035 and cannot be painted.
2.4” high plinths are always colored RAL 7022 (umber grey).
3.Cabinet frames and interiors are always colored RAL 7035.
+D4Z01R04
Y11
Factory assembly into transport sections (specify sections)
With this option, Cabinet Modules are factory assembled
into transport sections with a maximum total width of up to
approx. 8 ft. (2,400 mm). The modules in a section are
interconnected, both mechanically and electrically (electrical
interconnections include the auxiliary power supply system,
and power connections between Line Connection Modules
and Line Modules. Control connections are not included –
please refer to the section on Integration Engineering).
The DC bus (options M80 to M87) in a transport section is
provided as a solid bus for the complete section, to reduce
the number a connection points. For this reason the identical
bus size must be specified for Cabinet Modules in one section.
Which Cabinet Modules are to be included in a specific
transport section, and their sequence from left to right
must be specified in plain text according to the syntax below:
Plain text specification:
TE
1
—
Field 1
80
Y32
Two line label for system identification, 40 x 180 mm
Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying
Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the
cabinet door.
Dimensions H × W: 40 × 180 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 7.1“)
The text must be specified in plain text when ordering.
5
Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”).
Field 2: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”).
Field 3: Max. 20 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”).
1...5
Transport section
Sequence no. of transport section
Position of Cabinet Module within transport section
Examples:
TE1-1 for the 1st cabinet in transport section 1
TE1-2 for the 2nd cabinet in transport section 1
TE2-1 for the 1st cabinet in transport section 2
Option Y11 is particularly recommended for units comprising Line Connection Modules and Line Modules because the required power connections, and connections for precharge circuits, for example, are made in the factory.
A transport section is always shipped with a transportation
beam (option M90 is not required).
Y31
One line label for system identification, 40 x 80 mm
Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying
Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the
cabinet door.
Dimensions H × W: 40 × 80 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 3.2“)
40
90
+D4Z01R04 -31FA011
infeed roller FS
Field 1
Field 2
40
Field 3
180
Y33
Four line label for system identification, 40 x 180 mm
Lamicoid labels (white with black lettering) for identifying
Cabinet Modules are available. The labels are attached to the
cabinet door.
Dimensions H × W: 40 × 180 mm (approx. 1.6“ x 7.1“)
The text must be specified in plain text when ordering.
Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”).
Field 2: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”).
Field 3: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). Field 4: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). Field 5: Max. 20 characters, font size 6 mm (approx. 0.25”). The text must be specified in plain text when ordering.
Field 1: Max. 9 characters, font size 10 mm (approx. 0.4”).
80
+D4Z01R04
Field 1
-31 FA011 Short text 1 Field 2
-31FA012 Short text 2 Field 3
-31FA013 Short text 3 Field 4
-31FA014 Short text 4 Field 5
40
180
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
5/19
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Notes
5
5/20
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
5
Engineering Information
6
6/2
Technical data
Electrical and mechanical specifications
Ambient conditions
Mechanical stability
Compliance with standards
6/5
Characteristic curves
Derating due to altitude and temperature
Derating as a function of pulse frequency
Overload capability
6/8
Control units and interfaces
CU320-2 DP Control Unit
CU320-2 PN Control Unit
SINAMICS S120 firmware
CBE20 Communications board Ethernet
BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
AOP30 Basic Operator Panel
Customer Terminal Block – X55
6/19
Sensor and I/O modules
SMC10 Sensor Module
SMC20 Sensor Module
SMC30 Sensor Module
TM150 Terminal (RTD) Module
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
6/24
Connection system – Signal cables
DRIVE-CLIQ cables
6/28
Safety Integrated
Safety Integrated Functions
TM54F Terminal Module, Fail Safe
SBA Safe Brake Adapter
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Technical data
Technical data
General technical specifications
Electrical specifications
Line voltages
6
Line supply types
Line frequency
Output frequency 2)
• Control type Servo
• Control type Vector
• Control type V/Hz
Line power factor
Fundamental
• Basic Line Module
• Smart Line Module
• Active Line Module
Efficiency
• Basic Line Module
• Smart Line Module
• Active Line Module
• Motor Module
Overvoltage category
Control method
Fixed speeds
Skipped speed ranges
Setpoint resolution
Braking operation
Mechanical specifications
Enclosure type
Protection class
Touch protection
Cabinet system
Paint finish
Type of cooling
1) For
380 … 480 V 3 AC, ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
500 … 600 (690) V 1) 3 AC, ±10 % (-15 % < 1 min)
Grounded TN/TT systems and non-grounded IT systems
47 … 63 Hz
0 … 650 Hz
0 … 600 Hz
0 … 600 Hz
> 0.96
> 0.96
Adjustable (factory setting = unity power factor)
> 99.0 %
> 98.5 %
> 97.5 % (including Active Interface Module)
> 98.5 %
III to IEC 61800-5-1
Vector/servo control with and without encoder or V/Hz control
15 fixed speeds plus 1 minimum speed, parameterizable (in the default setting, 3 fixed setpoints plus 1
minimum speed are selectable using terminal block/PROFIBUS/PROFINET)
4, parameterizable
0.001 rpm digital (14 bits + sign)
12 bit analog
With Active Line Modules and Smart Line Modules, four-quadrant operation as standard (energy recovery).
With Basic Line Modules, single-quadrant operation as standard.
Braking using an optional braking module.
Base IP20, optionally NEMA 1 up to NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54)
I acc. to IEC 61800-5-1
IEC 50274/BGV A3 for the intended purpose, and per UL508A
Rittal TS 8, doors with double-barb lock, three-section base plates for cable entry
RAL 7035 (indoor requirements)
Forced air cooling AF to IEC 60146
UL listing the maximum supply voltage is 600 V AC. However, Cabinet Modules are rated for 690 V AC per IEC standards.
Please note:
- The correlation between the maximum output frequency, pulse frequency and current derating. Higher output frequencies for
specific configurations are available on request.
- The correlation between the minimum output frequency and permissible output current (current derating).
2)
6/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Technical data
Technical data
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
Storage 1)
-13 ... 131 °F (-25 ... +55 °C)
Relative humidity
(condensation not permissible)
Environmental class/harmful
chemical substances
Organic/biological influences
5 ... 95% 2)
acc. to IEC 60721-3-1
Class 1C2
acc. to IEC 60721-3-1
Class 1B1
acc. to IEC 60721-3-1
Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1
Cabinet Modules, chassis format:
up to 2000 m above sea level, without derating, > 2000 m, see characteristic curves/derating data
For Motor Modules Booksize Cabinet Kit format:
up to 1000 m above sea level without derating, > 1000 m, see characteristic curves/derating data
Operation
Transport 1)
Storage 1)
Class 1M2
Class 2M2
—
acc. to IEC 60721-3-1
acc. to IEC 60721-3-2
1.5 mm at 5 ... 9 Hz
3.1 mm at 5 ... 9 Hz
0.075 mm at 10 ... 58 Hz
5 m/s² at > 9 ... 200 Hz
10 m/s² at > 9 ... 200 Hz
9.8 m/s² at > 58 ... 200 Hz
Class 1M2
Class 2M2
Class 3M4
acc. to IEC 60721-3-1
acc. to IEC 60721-3-2
acc. to IEC 60721-3-3
40 m/s² at 22 ms
100 m/s² at 11 ms
100 m/s² at 11 ms
Degree of pollution
Installation altitude
Mechanical stability
Vibration load
• Deflection
• Acceleration
Shock load
• Acceleration
Compliance with standards
Conformances/approvals,
according to
Radio interference
suppression
1)
2)
Transport 1)
-13 ... 158 °F (-25 ... +70 °C)
down to -40 °F (-40 °C) 2) for
24 hours
5 ... 95% at 40 °C
Class 2K3 acc. to IEC 60721-3-2
Class 2C2
acc. to IEC 60721-3-2
Class 2B1
acc. to IEC 60721-3-2
Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1
Operation
32 ... +104 °F (0 ... +40 °C)
to +122 °F (+50 °C)
see derating data
5 ... 95% 2)
Class 3K3 acc. to IEC 60721-3-3
Class 3C2
acc. to IEC 60721-3-3
Class 3B1
acc. to IEC 60721-3-3
Class 2 acc. to IEC 61800-5-1
6
CE (EMC Directive No. 2004/108/EC and Low-Voltage Directive No. 2006/95/EC).
Optional UL listing to UL508A.
SINAMICS drive systems are not designed for connection to the public network (first
environment). Radio interference suppression is compliant with the EMC product standard for
variable speed drives IEC 61800-3, “Second environment” (industrial line supplies). The equipment
can cause electromagnetic interference when it is connected to the public network.
In transport packaging.
Deviations with respect to the specified class are underlined.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/3
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Technical data
Technical data
The most important directives and standards are listed below. These are used as basis for the SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
drive system and they must be carefully observed to achieve an EMC-compliant configuration that is safe both functionally and
in operation.
European directives
2006/95/EC
Low-voltage directive:
Legal guidelines of the EU member states concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits
2004/108/EC
EMC directive:
Legal guidelines of the EU member states for electromagnetic compatibility
European standards
6
ISO 13849-1
Safety of machinery – safety-related parts of control systems;
Part 1: General design guidelines (ISO 13849-1: 2006) (replaces EN 954-1)
IEC 60146-1-1
Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line-commutated converters
Part 1-1: Specification of basic requirements
IEC 60204-1
Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines;
Part 1: General requirements
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 61508-1
Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems
Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61800-2
Variable-speed electric drives
Part 2: General requirements – Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems
IEC 61800-3
Variable-speed electric drives
Part 3: EMC requirements including specific test methods
IEC 61800-5-1
Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems
Part 5: Safety requirements
Main section 1: Electrical and thermal requirements
IEC 61800-5-2
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
Part 5-2: Safety requirements – Functional safety (IEC 61800-5-2:) 2007
North American standards
NEMA ICS 7
Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives
NEMA ICS 7.1
Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Operation of Adjustable-Speed
Drive Systems
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V max)
UL508A (optional)
Enclosed industrial control panels (options U90/U91)
UL508C
Power Conversion Equipment
6/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Characteristic curves
Characteristic curves
Derating data for motor modules, booksize format
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules with booksize motor
modules and the associated system components are
rated for an ambient temperature of 104 °F (40 °C) and
installation altitudes up to 3,300 ft (1,000 m) above sea
level. If SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules with booksize
motor modules are operated at ambient temperatures higher
than 104 °F (40 °C) and/or installation altitudes higher than
3,300 ft (1,000 m) above sea level, then the corresponding
derating factors must be taken into account as a function of
the ambient temperature and/or the installation altitude.
These derating factors are different to the derating factors
for the chassis format power units and are listed in Catalog
PM 21.
Derating data for the chassis format
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules and the associated system
components are rated for an ambient temperature of 104 °F
(40 °C) and installation altitudes up to 6,600 ft (2,000 m)
above sea level.
For ambient temperatures > 104 °F (40 °C) the output current
must be reduced. Ambient temperatures above 122 °F (50 °C)
are not permissible.
At installation altitudes > 6,600 ft ( >2,000 m) above sea
level, it must be taken into consideration that with
increasing altitude, the air pressure decreases and therefore
the air density. As a consequence, the cooling efficiency and
the insulation capacity of the air also decrease.
Due to the reduced cooling efficiency, it is necessary, on one
hand, to reduce the ambient temperature and on the other
hand, to lower heat loss in the Cabinet Module by reducing
the output current, whereby ambient temperatures lower
than 104 °F (40 °C) may be offset to compensate.
The following table specifies the permissible output current
as a function of the installation altitude and ambient
temperature for the various enclosure types.
The values apply under the precondition that it is guaranteed
that the cooling air flow is as specified in the technical data.
Installation
Current derating factor (as a % of the rated current) for an ambient/air intake temperature of
altitude above
sea level
m
68 °F (20 °C)
77 °F (25 °C)
86 °F (30 °C)
95 °F (35 °C)
104 °F (40 °C)
113 °F (45 °C)
For NEMA 1 and NEMA 1 filtered (IP20 to IP43) enclosures
0 to 6,600 ft 93.3%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
(0 to 2,000 m)
up to 8,200 ft 96.3%
100%
100%
100%
100%
(up to 2,500 m)
up to 9,800 ft 98.7%
100%
100%
100%
(up to 3,000 m)
up to 11,500 ft 100%
100%
100%
(up to 3,500 m)
up to 13,100 ft 96.3%
100%
100%
(up to 4,000 m)
up to 14,800 ft 97.5%
100%
(up to 4,500 m)
up to 16,400 ft 98.2%
(up to 5,000 m)
For NEMA 12 ventilated (IP54) enclosures
0 to 6,600 ft 93.3%
86.7%
100%
100%
100%
100%
(0 to 2,000 m)
up to 8,200 ft 96.3%
89.8%
100%
100%
100%
(up to 2,500 m)
up to 9,800 ft 98.7%
92.5%
100%
100%
(up to 3,000 m)
up to 11,500 ft 94.7%
100%
100%
(up to 3,500 m)
up to 13,100 ft 96.3%
90.7%
100%
(up to 4,000 m)
up to 14,800 ft 97.5%
92.1%
(up to 4,500 m)
up to 16,400 ft 93.0%
(up to 5,000 m)
122 °F (50 °C)
86.7%
80.0%
Current-derating factors for Cabinet Modules as a function of the ambient/air intake temperature, the installation altitude and the enclosure type
Voltage derating:
For installation altitudes from 6,600 ft (2,000 m) up to
16,400 ft (5,000 m), voltage derating is additionally required.
Alternatively, voltage derating may be avoided by inserting an
isolating transformer upstream and in close proximity to the
drive, to reduce transient overvoltages to levels permitted by
EN 60664-1. For additional information, please refer to the
SINAMICS Low Voltage Engineering Manual.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/5
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Characteristic curves
Characteristic curves
Current derating for SINAMICS S120 Motors Modules,
chassis format as a function of the pulse frequency
For control performance reasons or to increase output frequency, the pulse frequency can be increased relative to the factory setting. When the pulse frequency is increased, the output current needs to be derated. This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical data.
An increased pulse frequency may also be used to reduce
motor noise. Note that SINAMICS S120 firmware also includes functionality that allows an increased pulse
frequency without derating, when conditions permit (load,
ambient temperature, and input voltage). The pulse
frequency is automatically reduced if the drive approaches its thermal limits.
For additional information, please refer to the SINAMICS Low
Voltage Engineering Manual.
Motor Module
chassis format
Rated
Rated
Rated
Derating factor
power at
power at
output
at pulse frequency
460 (400) V
460 V
current IN
Order No.
kW
HP
A
2.5 kHz
4 kHz
5 kHz
7.5 kHz
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
6SL3720-1TE32-1AA3
150
125 (110)
210
95%
82%
74%
54%
6SL3720-1TE32-6AA3
200
160 (132)
260
95%
83%
74%
54%
6SL3720-1TE33-1AA3
200 (160)
250
310
97%
88%
78%
54%
6SL3720-1TE33-8AA3
300
380
96%
87%
77%
54%
250 (200)
6SL3720-1TE35-0AA3
400
300 (250)
490
94%
78%
71%
53%
Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz
Motor Module
chassis format
6
Rated
power at
460 (400) V or
575 (690) V
Order No.
kW
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3ph. AC
6SL3720-1TE36-1AA3
355 (315)
6SL3720-1TE37-5AA3
450 (400)
6SL3720-1TE38-4AA3
500 (450)
6SL3720-1TE41-0AA3
650 (560)
6SL3720-1TE41-2AA3
800 (710)
6SL3720-1TE41-4AA3
900 (800)
Line voltage 500 … 600 V 3ph. AC
6SL3720-1TG28-5AA3
60 (75)
6SL3720-1TG31-0AA3
75 (90)
6SL3720-1TG31-2AA3
90 (110)
6SL3720-1TG31-5AA3
110 (132)
6SL3720-1TG31-8AA3
132 (160)
6SL3720-1TG32-2AA3
160 (200)
6SL3720-1TG32-6AA3
200 (250)
6SL3720-1TG33-3AA3
250 (315)
6SL3720-1TG34-1AA3
300 (400)
6SL3720-1TG34-7AA3
350 (450)
6SL3720-1TG35-8AA3
450 (560)
6SL3720-1TG37-4AA3
560 (710)
6SL3720-1TG38-1AA3
630 (800)
6SL3720-1TG38-8AA3
750 (900)
6SL3720-1TG41-0AA3
800 (1,000)
6SL3720-1TG41-3AA3
1,000 (1,200)
8 kHz
50%
50%
50%
50%
50%
Rated
power at
460 V or
575V
HP
Rated
output
current IN
Derating factor
at pulse frequency
A
2 kHz
2.5 kHz
4 kHz
5 kHz
7.5 kHz
500
600
700
800
1,000
1,150
605
745
840
985
1,260
1,405
83%
83%
87%
92%
92%
97%
72%
72%
79%
87%
87%
95%
64%
64%
64%
70%
70%
74%
60%
60%
55%
60%
60%
64%
40%
40%
40%
50%
50%
50%
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
300
400
450
600
700
800
900
1,000
1,250
85
100
120
150
175
215
260
330
410
465
575
735
810
910
1,025
1,270
93%
92%
92%
90%
92%
92%
92%
89%
89%
92%
91%
87%
97%
92%
91%
87%
89%
88%
88%
84%
87%
87%
88%
82%
82%
87%
85%
79%
95%
87%
86%
79%
71%
71%
71%
66%
70%
70%
71%
65%
65%
67%
64%
64%
71%
67%
64%
55%
60%
60%
60%
55%
60%
60%
60%
55%
55%
55%
50%
55%
55%
55%
50%
40%
40%
40%
40%
35%
40%
40%
40%
40%
35%
35%
35%
35%
35%
33%
30%
25%
Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency for units with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz
The following table lists the approx. maximum output frequency as a function of pulse frequency, at default 250 s current
controller clock cycle. Higher output frequencies are possible at higher pulse frequencies and current controller clock cycles as
low as 125 s:
Pulse frequency
1.25 kHz
2.00 kHz
2.50 kHz
≥ 4.00 kHz
6/6
Max. output frequency
100 Hz
160 Hz
200 Hz
300 Hz
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Characteristic curves
Characteristic curves
Overload capability
SINAMICS S120 drives may be operated with both variable
torque and constant torque loads at either low or high overload duties. The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated at its base load current before and after the overload occurs, based on a duty cycle duration of 300 s.
For short, repeating load cycles with significant load
fluctuations within the load cycle, please refer to the
appropriate sections in the SINAMICS Low Voltage
Engineering Manual.
Motor Modules booksize format
Motor Modules with power units in the booksize format have
the following overload capabilities:
Drive overload current
Short-time current
1.76 IH
Rated current (continuous)
1 .5 IH
Motor Modules chassis format
IH
Motor Modules with power units in the chassis format can
be configured on the basis of different base load currents.
30 s
60 s
G_D213_EN_00049
Base load current IL
for high overload
300 s
The base load current for a low overload IL is the basis for a
duty cycle of 110 % for 60 s or 150 % for 10 s.
Drive output current
10 s
High overload
1.5 x IL
Line Modules chassis format
The base load current for a high overload I H DC is the basis for
a duty cycle of 150 % for 60s or I max DC for 5 s.
Short-time current 150 %
Short-time current 110 %
Rated current (continuous)
Converter current
5s
Base load current IL
for low overload
60 s
300 s
Short-time current 150 %
1.5 x IH DC
Rated current (continuous)
Base load current IH DC
for high overload
t
Low overload
6
Short-time current Imax
Imax DC
G_D213_EN_00035
1.1 x IL
Irated DC
The base load current for a high overload IH is the basis for a
duty cycle of 150 % for 60 s or 160 % for 10 s.
IH DC
60 s
300 s
Drive output current
10 s
1.6 x IH
t
Short-time current 160 %
1.5 x IH
G_D213_EN_00079
Irated
IL
t
Short-time current 150 %
Rated current (continuous)
IH
60 s
G_D213_EN_00036
Base load current IH for high overload
Irated
300 s
t
High overload
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/7
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Control units
Overview
• The SINAMICS Control Unit can handle simple technological tasks by itself
• The CU320-2 DP or CU320-2 PN Control Units are used in
conjunction with all Motor Modules or Line Modules for single or multi-motor drives.
• Sophisticated motion control tasks can be implemented with the support of the more powerful, performance graded Control Units D410-2, D425-2, D435-2 and D445-2 of SIMOTION D. Refer to Catalog PM 21 for information
on SIMOTION.
Each of these Control Units is based on an object-oriented
SINAMICS standard firmware, which contains all the most
popular control modes and can be scaled to meet even the
most advanced performance requirements.
New system architecture with a central control module
6
In multi-axis drives, the individual drives are controlled from
the higher-level control systems in such a way as to achieve
the desired coordinated movement. This requires cyclic data
exchange between the controller and the drives. In previous
drive designs, this exchange took place via a field bus,
requiring complex installation and configuration. SINAMICS
takes a new approach in this respect: A central control module can control the drives for multiple axes and also
establishes the technological links between the drives and/
or axes. Since all the required data is stored in the central
control module, it does not need to be transferred. Inter-axis
connections can be established within a Control Unit and easily configured in the STARTER commissioning tool using a mouse.
The drive controls are supplied as ready-to-configure drive objects:
• Vector control
- Speed-controlled drives with high speed and torque
stability in general mechanical engineering systems
- Particularly suitable for induction motors
• Servo control
- Drives with highly dynamic motion control
- Angular-locked synchronism with isochronous
PROFIBUS/PROFINET
- For use in machine tools and clocked
production machines
The most commonly used V/Hz control modes are stored
in the “Vector control” drive object and are ideal for implementing even simple applications such as group drives
with SIEMOSYN motors.
Overview of key open-loop and closed-loop control functions.
Closed-loop control
types S120
Open-loop control
types S120
Main functions S120 for
booksize/chassis
Comment, note
Vector
control
• Induction motor
- Torque control
with/without encoder
- Speed control
with/without encoder
• Torque motor (permanent
magnet synchronous motor)
- Torque control
with encoder
- Speed control
with/without encoder
• For induction and torque
motors
- Position control with encoder
- Linear V/Hz characteristic
- Constant-frequency V/Hz
characteristic (textile)
- Independent voltage
setpoint input
• Data set changeover
• Extended setpoint input
• Motor identification
• Current/speed controller
optimization
• Technology controller
• Basic positioner
• Automatic restart
• Flying restart with
/without encoder
• Kinetic buffering
• Synchronization
• Droop
• Brake control
Mixed operation with V/Hz
control modes is possible; it is
for this reason that the V/Hz
control modes are stored only
once in the “Vector control”
drive object.
Position control can be
selected as a function module
from both Servo and Vector
mode.
Permanent-magnet 1FW4 synchronous motors can be operated over the complete operating range in Vector
control.
Servo
control
• Induction motor
- Torque control
with/without encoder
- Speed control
with/without encoder
• Synchronous motor, linear
motor and torque motor
- Torque control
with encoder
- Speed control
with/without encoder
• For all motor types
- Position control with encoder
- Linear V/Hz characteristic
- Constant-frequency V/Hz
characteristic (textile)
- Independent voltage
setpoint input
• Data set changeover
• Setpoint input
• Motor identification
• Damping application
• Technology controller
• Basic positioner
• Brake control
Mixed operation with V/Hz
control modes is possible; it
is for this reason that the V/Hz
control modes are stored only
once in the “Vector control” drive object.
Position control can be
selected as a function module
from both Servo and Vector
mode.
6/8
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Control units
Overview
Drive objects
A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and, if necessary, its own fault messages and alarms.
Drive objects
Control Unit
On-board
I/O
evaluation
Infeed
control
Drive
control
...
Drive
control
Option
Board
evaluation
Terminal
Module
evaluation
...
Terminal
Module
evaluation
Line
Module
Motor
Module
Motor
Module
Comprehensive package of open-loop and closed-loop
control functions
A wide variety of standard functions such as setpoint input,
data set changeover, controller optimization, kinetic
buffering, etc. ensure a high degree of functional reliability
and excellent flexibility when addressing the application.
BICO technology
Every drive object contains a large number of input and
output variables which can be freely and independently
interconnected using Binector Connector Technology (BICO).
A binector is a logic signal which can assume the value 0 or
1. A connector is a numerical value, e.g. the actual speed or
current setpoint.
Drive Control Chart (DCC)
Drive Control Chart (DCC) is an additional option for the easy
configuration of technological functions for SINAMICS.
The block library encompasses a large selection of closedloop, arithmetic and logic blocks, as well as a more comprehensive range of open-loop and closed-loop control
functions. The user friendly DCC Editor enables easy
graphics-based configuration, allows control loop structures
to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that have already been created. DCC
is an add-on to the STARTER commissioning tool.
CompactFlash card
The functions of the drives are stored on a CompactFlash card.
This card contains the firmware and parameter settings for all
drives in the form of a project. The CompactFlash card can
also hold additional projects, which means that the correct
project can be accessed immediately when series machines of
different types are commissioned. When the Control Unit has
booted, the data on the CompactFlash card is read and loaded
to the RAM.
Terminal
Module
Terminal
Module
G_D211_EN_00057a
Option
Board
Integral safety functions (Safety Integrated)
The Control Units support an extensive range of safety functions.
The integrated safety functions are the Safety Integrated Basic
functions
• STO = Safe Torque Off
• SBC = Safe Brake Control
• SS1 = Safe Stop 1 (Time controlled)
and the Safety Integrated Extended functions that require a license
• STO = Safe Torque Off
• SS1 = Safe Stop 1 (time and acceleration controlled)
• SS2 = Safe Stop 2
• SOS = Safe Operating Stop
• SLS = Safely Limited Speed
• SSM = Safe Speed Monitor
• SDI = Safe Direction
If the integrated safety functions are used, licenses,
supplementary system components such as TM54F Terminal
Modules, or suitable safety controls may be necessary.
Diagnostics optimally supported by trace function
The time characteristics of input and output variables
associated with drive objects can be measured by the
integrated trace function and displayed using the STARTER
commissioning tool. Several signals can be simultaneously
traced. A recording can be triggered as a function of freely
selectable boundary conditions, e.g. the value of an input or output variable.
The firmware is organized in objects. Drive objects are used to
implement open-loop and closed-loop control functions for
Line Modules, Motor Modules, Power Modules and other
system components connected by DRIVE-CLiQ.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/9
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Control units
Function
Software and protective functions
A selection of commonly used standard functions is described below:
Software and
protective functions
6
Description
Setpoint input
The setpoint can be input both internally and externally. It is applied internally as a fixed set point, motorized
potentiometer setpoint or jog setpoint and externally via the communications interface or an analog input on the
customer terminal block. The internal fixed setpoint and the motorized potentiometer setpoint can be switched over or adjusted using control commands from any interface.
Motor identification
The automatic motor identification function makes commissioning faster and easier and optimizes closed-loop
control of the drive.
Ramp-function
generator
A user-friendly ramp-function generator with separately adjustable ramp up and ramp down times, together with
adjustable rounding times in the lower and upper speed ranges, allows the drive to be smoothly accelerated and
braked. This results in a good speed control response and plays its role in reducing the stress on the mechanical system. The down ramp can be parameterized separately for a quick stop.
Vdc max controller
The Vdc max controller automatically prevents overvoltages in the DC link if the down ramp is too short, for example. This may also extend the set ramp-down time.
Comment: This function only makes sense for single-axis applications.
Kinetic buffering
(KIP)
For brief line supply failures, the kinetic energy of the rotating machine is used to buffer the DC bus and therefore
prevents fault trips. The drive converter remains operational as long as the drive can provide regenerative energy
as a result of its motion and the DC link voltage does not drop below the shutdown threshold. When the line supply
recovers within this time, the drive is again bumplessly accelerated up to its setpoint speed.
Automatic restart
The automatic restart switches the drive on again when the power is restored after a power failure, and ramps up to the current speed setpoint.
Flying restart
The flying restart function allows the drive to be switched to a motor that is still turning.
Technology
controller
Using the technology controller (PID controller) function module, level or flow controls and complex tension controls can be implemented, for example. The existing D component can act both on the system deviation as
well as on the actual value (factory setting). The P, I, and D components are separately set.
Free function blocks
Using the freely programmable function blocks, it is easy to implement logic and arithmetic functions for
controlling the SINAMICS drive. The blocks can be programmed by means of an operator panel or the STARTER
commissioning tool.
Drive Control Chart
(DCC)
Drive Control Chart (DCC) is an additional tool for the easy configuration of technological functions for SINAMICS.
The block library contains a large selection of control, arithmetic and logic blocks as well as extensive open-loop
and closed loop control functions. The user-friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows
control loop structures to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that have
already been created. DCC is an add-on to the STARTER commissioning tool ( Tools and engineering).
I 2t detection for
motor protection
A motor model in the drive firmware calculates the motor temperature based on the current speed and
load. More exact sensing of the temperature, which also takes into account the influence of the ambient
temperature, is possible by means of direct temperature sensing using KTY84 sensors in the motor winding.
Motor temperature
evaluation
Motor protection by evaluating a KTY84, PTC or Pt100 temperature sensor. When a KTY84 temperature sensor is
connected, the limit values can be set for alarm or shutdown. When a PTC thermistor is connected, the system reaction to triggering of the thermistor (alarm or shutdown) can be defined.
Motor blocking
protection
A blocked motor is detected and protected against thermal overloading by a fault trip.
Power unit protection
Power unit
protection
Description
Ground fault monitoring at the output
A ground fault at the output end is detected by an aggregate current monitor and results in shutdown in
grounded-neutral systems.
Electronic shortcircuit protection
at the output
A short-circuit at the output (e.g. at the drive output terminals, in the motor cable or in the motor terminal box) is detected and the drive shuts down with a “fault.”
Thermal overload
protection
An alarm is issued first when the overtemperature threshold responds. If the temperature continues to rise,
the unit either shuts down or independently adjusts the pulse frequency or output current so that thermal
load is reduced. Once the cause of the fault has been eliminated (e.g. cooling has been improved), the original operating values are automatically resumed.
6/10
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
CU320-2 Control Unit
Overview
• 1 interface for the BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
• 1 slot for the CompactFlash card on which firmware and
parameters are stored
• 1 slot for mounting an option module (e.g. TB30 Terminal
Board or CBE20 Communications Board Ethernet)
• 2 rotary coding switches for manually setting the PROFIBUS
address
• 1 Ethernet interface for commissioning and diagnostics
• 3 test sockets and one reference ground for commissioning
support
• 1 connection for the electronics power supply via the 24 V DC
supply connector
• 1 PE/protective conductor connection
• 1 ground connection
A shield connection for the signal cable shield on the option
module is located on the CU320-2 Control Unit.
The communication, open-loop and closed-loop control functions for one or more Line Modules and/or Motor
Modules are executed in the CU320-2 Control Unit.
Two versions of the CU320-2 Control Unit are available, with different bus communication protocols:
The available option slot is used to expand the interfaces, e.g.
terminals or communication.
The status of the CU320-2 Control Unit is indicated via
multi-color LEDs.
- CU320-2 DP (option K90) with one PROFIBUS interface with PROFIdrive profile
As the firmware and parameter settings are stored on a plug-in CompactFlash card, the Control Unit can be changed
without the need for software tools.
- CU320-2 PN (option K95) with a PROFINET interface with PROFIdrive profile
Integration
Additional bus communication protocols are available by
inserting a communications module in the option slot.
Design
The CU320-2 Control Unit has the following interfaces
as standard:
• 4 x DRIVE-CLiQ sockets for communication with other DRIVE-CLiQ nodes, e.g. Motor Modules, Active Line
Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules
• 12 parameterizable digital inputs (isolated)
• 8 parameterizable bidirectional digital inputs/digital outputs
(non-floating)
• 1 serial RS232 interface (e.g. to connect the AOP30
Advanced Operator Panel)
DRIVE-CLiQ components such as Motor Modules and Active
Line Modules can be connected to a CU320-2 Control Unit.
The number of modules depends on the performance required, including duty type and additional functions.
The CU320-2 Control Unit and other connected components
are commissioned and diagnosed using the STARTER
commissioning tool from Version 4.1 SP5 and the installed
SINAMICS Support Package SSP_SINAMICS_V4_3_2 or the
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel.
The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel can also be snapped onto the
CU320-2 Control Unit during operation for troubleshooting.
The CU320-2 Control Unit requires a CompactFlash card
with firmware.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/11
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
CU320-2 Control Unit
Technical data
CU320-2 Control Unit
6
Current demand, max.
At 24 V DC,
without taking into account digital outputs, expansion option
slot and DRIVE-CLiQ supply
1.0 A
Digital inputs
In accordance with IEC 61131-2 Type 1
12 isolated digital inputs
8 bidirectional non-isolated digital inputs/digital outputs
-3 … +30 V
-3 … +5 V
15 … 30 V
9 mA
• Voltage
• Low level (an open digital input is interpreted as “low”)
• High level
• Current consumption at 24 V DC, typ.
• Delay time of digital inputs1), approx.
-L H
-H L
• Delay time of high-speed digital inputs1), approx.
-L H
-H L
• Conductor cross-section, max.
Digital outputs
Continuously short-circuit proof
• Voltage
• Load current per digital output, max.
• Delay time 1), typ./max.
-L H
-H L
• Conductor cross-section, max.
Power loss
Conformity
Approvals, according to
50 s
100 s
5 s
50 s
#14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
8 bidirectional non-isolated digital inputs/digital outputs
24 V DC
500 mA
150 s/400 s
75 s/100 s
#14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
24 W
CE
cULus
1) The specified delay times refer to the hardware. The actual reaction time depends on the time slot in which the digital input or output is processed.
Overview
Design
A CU320-2 Control Unit can perform the communication,
open loop and closed-loop control functions for several
power units. The computing capacity requirement increases
in proportion to the number of power units and system
components and in relation to the dynamic response
required. The computing capacity requirement and
utilization of the CU320-2 Control Unit can be calculated
with the SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool. The full
computing capacity of the CU320-2 Control Unit is only
available on systems with performance expansion (option
K94). For the CU320-2 Control Unit, the performance
expansion is necessary from the 4th axis.
The CompactFlash card contains the firmware and
parameter settings. The CompactFlash card is plugged into
the appropriate slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit
6/12
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
In addition to the firmware, the CompactFlash card also
contains licensing codes that are required to enable firmware options (currently, the performance expansion
and the Safety Integrated Extended Functions). The Safety
Integrated Extended Functions must be ordered for each axis
via option codes (K01 to K05).
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
CBE20 Communication Board
Overview
SINAMICS Link
SINAMICS Link can be used to directly exchange data between
several CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)
Control Units without using a higher-level control system.
Possible applications for the SINAMICS Link include:
• Torque sharing for several drives
• Setpoint cascading for several drives
• Load distribution for drives coupled through a material web
• Coordination between SINAMICS G or SINAMICS S with the
CU320-2 Control Unit and SINAMICS DC Master with CUD
Control Units.
Only CU320-2 Control Units or CUD Control Units of the SINAMICS DC Master can be integrated into this communication network.
The CBE20 Communication Board (option G33) is required, if
• a CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) Control Unit, is to be connected to a PROFINET-IO network
• a CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)
Control Unit is to be connected to an EtherNet/IP network
• SINAMICS Link is to be used to directly exchange data
between several CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) or CU320-2 PN
(PROFINET) Control Units without using a higher-level
control system.
The CBE20 is parameterized to operate in one of these
modes. In addition, the CBE20 allows Standard Ethernet
TCP/IP communication for engineering processes using
the STARTER commissioning tool on a PROFINET or
EtherNet/IP network:
SINAMICS Link is activated by appropriately parameterizing
the Control Units of the participants.
Integration
The CBE20 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the CU320-2 Control Unit.
Technical data
CBE20 Communication Board
Current demand
at 24 V DC
0.16 A
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
6
PROFINET
With the CBE20 Communication Board, SINAMICS S120 is a PROFINET IO device in the sense of PROFINET and can perform the following functions:
• PROFINET IO device
• 100 Mbit/s full duplex
• Supports real-time classes of PROFINET IO:
- RT (Real-Time)
- IRT (Isochronous Real-Time), minimum send cycle 500 s
• Connects to controls as PROFINET IO devices according to
the PROFIdrive profile
• Integrated 4-port switch with four RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC ERTEC400. The optimum topology (line, star, tree) can therefore be configured without additional external switches.
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP (EtherNet Industrial Protocol) is an open standard
predominantly used in the automation industry. EtherNet/
IP is supported by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association
(ODVA).
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/13
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
Overview
BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel can be snapped onto a
CU320-2 Control Unit and may be used to acknowledge
faults, set parameters and read diagnostic information (e.g. alarm and fault messages).
Design
The BOP20 Basic Operator Panel has a backlit two-line display
area and 6 keys.
6
The integrated plug connector on the rear side of the BOP20
Basic Operator Panel provides the power to the BOP20 Basic
Operator Panel and the communication with the CU320-2
Control Unit.
Selection and ordering data
Description
Order No.
BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
6SL3055-0AA00-4BA0
6/14
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
CU320-2 Control Unit with inserted BOP20 Basic Operator Panel
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel
Overview
• Two-stage safety concept to protect against accidental or
unauthorized changes to settings.
- Operation of the drive from the operator panel can be disabled by the keyboard lock so that only parameter values and process variables can be displayed on the
operating panel.
- A password can be used to prevent the unauthorized
modification of drive parameters.
• Front panel with degree of protection IP55
If just one CU320-2 Control Unit controls several power units
(multi-motor operation), then the parameters, alarms and
faults relating to all the devices connected can be displayed
and processed.
Function
The AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel can be added to a
CU320-2 Control Unit (option K08), and is mounted in the
cabinet door.
It has the following features and characteristics:
• Graphical backlit LCD display (240 × 64 pixels) for plain text, bar graphs or trend of process variables
• LEDs for display of operating modes
• Help function describing causes of and remedies for faults
and alarms
• 26-key membrane keyboard for operational control of
a drive
• Local/remote switchover for selecting the operating
location (priority assigned to operator panel or customer terminal block/PROFIBUS/PROFINET)
• Numeric keypad for input of setpoint or parameter values
• Function keys for prompted navigation in the menu
• 4 LEDs to signal the operating state of the drive:
- RUN: green
- ALARM: yellow
- FAULT: red
- Local/Remote: green
The current operating states, setpoints and actual values,
parameters, indices, faults and alarms are displayed on the
display panel.
Chinese, German, English, French, Italian and Spanish are
stored on the CU320-2 Control Unit CompactFlash card as
operator panel languages. The desired language must be
downloaded to the AOP30 prior to commissioning.
On request, Russian, Polish, and Czech are available in
addition to these languages installed as standard. These can
be downloaded free of charge from the Internet under the
following link: http://support.automation.siemens.com
Technical data
AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel
Current demand
at 24 V DC
0.16 A
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/15
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Customer Terminal Block -X55
Design
Overview
To connect signal cables on the customer side, terminal block
-X55 includes terminals -X122, -X132, -X41 and -X46
(terminals -X1 to -X4 are used inside the cabinet and are
not available). As a consequence, depending on the version
(with/without option K90 or K95) the following digital inputs/
outputs and/or signals are available:
The customer
terminal
block -X55
includes:
Motor Modules
chassis format
Line Modules
Without
Without
with
with
CU320-2 (K90/K95)
CU320-2 (K90/K95)
12 digital inputs DI
–
–
8 bidirectional
inputs/outputs
(DI/DO)
–
–
G_D213_XX_00078a
-X122, -X132
Customer terminal block -X55 represents the interface to the
I/O devices and marshals a range of cabinet-internal signals to
a central terminal block module mounted in the lower part of
the cabinet.
6
It can be used for Motor Modules in the chassis format as well
as together with options K90 (CU320-2 DP Control Unit) or
K95 (CU320-2 PN Control Unit) for Basic Line Modules, Smart
Line Modules, Active Line Modules and Booksize Cabinet Kits.
1)
-X41
Connection, safety
function Safe
Torque Off/Safe
Stop 1
– 1)
– 1)
Connection
temperature
sensor
KTY84/PTC/Pt100
– 1)
– 1)
–
–
-X46
Connection, Safe
Brake Adapter
For Booksize Cabinet Kits, a connection is provided at the separate customer terminal block -X55.1 or -X55.2.
6/16
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Customer Terminal Block – X55
Overview
Pin assignment
Customer terminal block - X55
-X122
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DI0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI16
DI17
M1
M
DI/DO8
DI/DO9
M
DI/DO10
DI/DO11
M
-X132
+24 V DC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI20
DI21
M2
M
DI/DO12
DI/DO13
M
DI/DO14
DI/DO15
M
1
2
3
4
EP M1
EP +24V
- Temp
+ Temp
1
2
3
4
BR Output +
BR Output FB Input +
FB Input -
-X41
Function
STO/ SS1
-X46
Interface to
Safe Brake
Adapter
G_D213_EN_00071a
Interface to
Chassis Power Unit
Interface to
Control Unit CU320-2
Terminal block -X55-X122 digital inputs/outputs
Terminal assignment of customer
terminal block -X55
Terminal Designation 1) Technical data
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DI 16
DI 17
Voltage -30 V to +30 V DC
Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC
Electrical isolation: Terminal M1 is the
reference potential
Level (including ripple):
High level: 15 V ... 30 V
Low level: -30 V ... +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
at 0 → 1: 50 s
at 1 → 0: 150 s
7
M1
Reference potential for terminals 1 to 6
8
M
Ground
9
10
11
12
13
14
DI/DO 8
DI/DO 9
As input:
Voltage -30 V ... +30 V DC
Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC
Level (including ripple):
High level: 15 V ... 30 V
Low level: -30 V ... +5 V
Fast inputs: 2)
DI/DO 8, 9, 10 and 11
Input delay (typ.):
at 0 → 1: 5 s
at 0 → 0: 50 s
As output:
Voltage 24 V DC
Max. load current for each output:
500 mA
continuously short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max.): 3)
at 0 → 1: 150 s/400 s
at 1 → 0: 75 s/100 s
Switching frequency:
For resistive load: max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: max. 10 Hz
Max. lamp load: 5 W
M
DI/DO 10
DI/DO 11
M
Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
Terminal assignment of customer terminal block -X55
1) DI: Digital input
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output
M: Electronics ground
M1: Reference ground
2) Can be used as measuring probe input or input for the external zero mark.
3) Data for: Ucc = 24 V; load 48 ; High (1) = 90 % Uout ; Low (0) = 10 % Uout.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/17
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Customer Terminal Block – X55
Design
Terminal block -X55-X132 digital inputs/outputs
Terminal
Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI 4
DI 5
DI 6
DI 7
DI 20
DI 21
1)
Technical data
Terminal
Function
Technical data
Voltage -30 V to +30 V DC
Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC
Electrical isolation: Terminal M2 is the
reference potential
Level (including ripple):
High level: 15 V ... 30 V
Low level: -30 V ... +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
at 0 → 1: 50 s
at 1 → 0: 150 s
1
EP M1
(enable
pauses)
EP +24 V
(enable
pauses)
Supply voltage 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
Current drain: 10 mA
Signal propagation times:
L → H: 100 s
H → L: 1000 s
The pulse inhibit function is only provided
if Safety Integrated Basic Functions have
been enabled
- Temp
+ Temp
Temperature sensor connection for motor
temperature sensing:
KTY84-1C130, PTC, Pt100
7
M2
Reference potential for terminals 1 to 6
8
M
Ground
9
10
11
12
13
14
DI/DO 12
DI/DO 13
M
DI/DO 14
DI/DO 15
M
As input:
Voltage -30 V ... +30 V DC
Current drain, typical: 9 mA at 24 V DC
Level (including ripple):
High level: 15 V ... 30 V
Low level: -30 V ... +5 V
Fast inputs: 2)
DI/DO 12, 13, 14 and 15
Input delay (typ.):
at 0 → 1: 5 s
at 0 → 0: 50 s
As output:
Voltage 24 V DC
Max. load current for each output:
500 mA
continuously short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max.): 3)
at 0 → 1: 150 /400 s
at 1 → 0: 75 s/100 s
Switching frequency:
For resistive load: max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: max. 10 Hz
Max. lamp load: 5 W
6
Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
1) DI: Digital input
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output
M: Electronics ground
M2: Reference ground
2) Can be used as measuring probe input or input for the external zero mark.
3) Data for: Ucc = 24 V; load 48 ; High (1) = 90 % Uout ; Low (0) = 10 % Uout.
6/18
Terminal block -X55-X41 temperature sensor connection
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
2
3
4
Maximum wire size: #12 AWG (2.5 mm2)
Terminal block -X55-X46 brake control and monitoring
Terminal
Function
Technical data
1
2
3
4
BR output +
BR output FB input +
FB input -
The interface is used to connect the
Safe Brake Adapter
Maximum wire size: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
SMC10 Sensor Module
Overview
Technical
Technicaldata
data
SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (option K46) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also
be connected via the SMC10.
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• 2-pole resolver
• Multipole resolver
Design
The SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the
following interfaces as standard:
Current demand, max.
At 24 V DC, without taking
encoder into account
0.2 A
Power loss max.
10 W
Encoders which can be
evaluated
• 2-pole resolver
• Multipole resolver
• Excitation voltage, rms
4.1 V
• Excitation frequency
5 ... 10 kHz depending on
the current controller clock
cycle of the Motor Module or
Power Module
• Transformation ratio
0.5
• Encoder frequency, max.
2 kHz (120,000 rpm)
depending on the pole pair
number of the resolver and
the current controller clock
cycle of the Motor Module or
Power Module
• Signal subdivision
(interpolation), max.
16,384 times (14 bit)
• Cable length to encoder, max.
426 ft (130 m)
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
6
• 1 encoder connection including motor temperature
detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector
The status of the SMC10 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is
indicated via a multi-color LED.
The signal cable shield can be connected via the encoder
system and can also be connected to the SMC10 Sensor Module via shield connection terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact
type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1.,
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/19
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
SMC20 Sensor Module
Overview
Technical
Technicaldata
data
SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
Current demand, max.
At 24 V DC, without taking
encoder into account
0.2 A
Power loss max.
Encoders which can be
evaluated
10 W
• Incremental encoder
sin/cos 1 V pp
• EnDat absolute encoder
• Encoder supply
The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (option K48) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also be connected via the SMC20.
6
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp
• EnDat absolute encoder
• SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals sin/cos 1 Vpp
(firmware version 2.4 and later)
• SSI encoder without incremental signals
The motor temperature can also be detected with KTY84-130
or PTC thermistors.
Design
The SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the
following interfaces as standard:
• 1 encoder connection including motor temperature
detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector
or terminals
The status of the SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is
indicated via a multi-color LED.
The signal cable shield can be connected via the encoder
system and can also be connected to the SMC20 Sensor
Module Cabinet-Module via shield connection terminal, e.g.
Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1.
6/20
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
• SSI encoder with
incremental mental signals sin/cos 1 V pp (firmware
version 2.4 and later)
5 V DC/0.35 A
• Encoder frequency incremental signals, max
• Signal subdivision
(interpolation), max.
• SSI baud rate
• Cable length to encoder, max.
500 kHz
PE connection
M4 screw
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
16,384 times (14 bit)
100kBaud
426 ft (130 m)
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
SMC30 Sensor Module
Overview
Technical data
SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
Current demand, max.
At 24 V DC, without taking
encoder into account
0.2 A
Power loss max.
Encoders which can be
evaluated
10 W
• Incremental encoder
TTL/HTL
• SSI encoder with TTL/HTL
incremental signals
• SSI encoder without
incremental signals
• Input impedence
- TTL
- HTL, max.
• Encoder supply
The SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (options K50
and K52) is required to evaluate the encoder signals of motors
without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface. External encoders can also be
connected via the SMC30.
The following encoder signals can be evaluated:
• Incremental encoders TTL/HTL with/without open-circuit
detection (open-circuit detection is only available with
bipolar signals)
• SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals
• SSI encoder without incremental signals
• Encoder frequency max.
• SSI baud rate
570
16 mA
24 V DC/0.35 A or
5 V DC/0.35 A
300 kHz
100 ... 250 kBaud
• Limiting frequency, max.
300 kHz
• Resolution absolute position SSI
30 bit
• Cable length, max.
- TTL encoder
- HTL encoder
The motor temperature can also be detected with KTY84-130
or PTC thermistors.
Design
The SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted features the following interfaces as standard:
• 1 encoder connection including motor temperature
detection (KTY84-130 or PTC) via SUB-D connector
or terminals
- SSI encoder
330 ft (100 m) (only bipolar
signals permitted) 1)
330 ft (100 m) for unipolar
signals
990 ft (300 m) for bipolar
signals 1)
330 ft (100 m)
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
1)
Signal cables twisted in pairs and shielded.
The status of the SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is
indicated via a multi-color LED.
The maximum encoder cable length between SMC30
modules and encoders is 330 ft (100 m). For HTL encoders,
this length can be increased to 990 ft (300 m) if the A*, A and
B*, B signals are evaluated and the power supply cable has a
minimum cross-section of #20 AWG (0.5 mm2).
The signal cable shield can be connected to the SMC30
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted via a shield connection
terminal, e.g. Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type
KLBÜ CO 1.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/21
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
TM150 Terminal (RTD) Module
Overview
Technical data
TM150 Terminal Module
Current demand
at 24 V DC
The TM150 RTD module (option G51 to G54 in the Line Connection Module) is suitable for monitoring a variety of
temperature sensors, over the temperature range -146°F
(-99°C) to +480°F (+250°C):
6
• Pt100 - Platinum RTD 100 ohm
• Pt1000 - Platinum RTD 1,000 ohm
• KTY84 - temperature sensor
• PTC - Positive temperature coefficient thermistor
• Temperature switch (NC) contact (for example
Thermoclick or bimetallic switch)
Up to 12 sensors in 2-wire connection or up to 6 sensors
in 3- or 4-wire connection can be connected to one
TM150. The TM150 detects wire breakage or a short
circuit in the RTD leads for Pt100, Pt1000 and KTY84
sensors, and short circuit for PTC thermistors.
Temperature values from the TM150 are available for
further processing. Motor winding temperatures can be
used for the thermal motor model in the closed loop
control. Temperature values can be displayed on the
AOP30, and transmitted to the process control system
via bus communications.
Note: TM150 inputs are not galvanically isolated. Only
temperature sensors isolated per IEC 61800-5-1 may be
connected to terminals “+Temp” and “-Temp”. Failure to
observe these instructions can result in electric shock!
6/22
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
0.5 A
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
Overview
Technical data
VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module
Current demand, max.
at 24 V DC
0.2 A
Power loss
<5 W
Line voltage detection
• Input resistance
- Terminal X521
- Terminal X522
> 362 kΩ/phase
> 2.5 MΩ/phase
Conformity
CE
Approvals, according to
cULus
The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module (option K51) allows the
line supply or motor voltage characteristic to be precisely
sensed. The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module is integrated in
Active Interface Modules chassis format and in Smart Line
Modules chassis format.
In addition, the VSM10 is used to switch to a rotating
synchronous motor (flying restart function).
Design
6
The VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module has the following interfaces:
• 1 connection for direct voltage sensing up to 690 V
• 1 connection for voltage sensing using voltage
transformers, max.100 V 3 ph.
• 2 analog inputs (reserved for resonance monitoring in
Active Interface Modules)
• 1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130 or PTC)
The status of the VSM10 Voltage Sensing Module is indicated
by a two-color LED.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/23
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Connection system
Signal cables
Overview
MOTION-CONNECT pre-assembled cables
are used whenever motor encoders on motors without DRIVECLiQ interface are connected to Sensor Modules.
Note: All 6FX.002-2C... signal cables are also available with
crimped contacts and connector housing supplied as a separate accessory.
• Signal cables with connector (supplied as loose part) for the
motor end. In this case, the 6th position of the Order No. must be changed from 0 to 4:
6FX.042-2C...-....
• Signal cables with connector (supplied as loose part) for the
module end. In this case, the 6th position of the Order No.
must be changed from 0 to 1:
6FX.012-2C...-....
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable
Integration
Signal cables are pre-assembled and are sold by the meter
for the connection of a variety of components.
• DRIVE-CLiQ cables
• MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables
• MOTION-CONNECT pre-assembled cables
Connection overview for the CU320-2 Control Unit
Applications
6
Pre-assembled signal cables
Control
Unit
CU320-2
Active
X400- Line
X100- 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
X402 Module
X103 or
6FX2002-1DC00-....
< 70 m(230 ft)
DRIVE-CLiQ cables
are used to connect components with DRIVE-CLiQ connections which have a separate or external 24 V DC
power supply.
DRIVE-CLiQ cables for connecting Line/Motor Modules with
a Control Unit are part of the scope of supply of the relevant
Cabinet Modules only if the control unit is mounted inside
the respective Module (option K90 or K95), or if integration
engineering is provided by the factory.
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables
are used whenever components with DRIVE-CLiQ connections
must meet high requirements such as mechanical stress and
oil resistance, e.g. when connections are made outside the
cabinet between
• Motor Modules and Sensor Modules
• Motor Modules and motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables have 24 V DC cores
6/24
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
or
6FX2002-1DC00-....
X100X103
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
or
6FX2002-1DC00-. . . .
< 70 m (230 ft)
X100- 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
X103 or
6FX2002-1DC00-. . . .
< 70 m (230 ft)
X126
X140
Basic
or X400- Line
X402 Module
Active
X500 Interface
Module
X400- Motor
X403 Module
X500-Terminal
X501 Modules
PROFIBUS connector
6ES7972-0BA42-0XA0 (without PG-connector)
or
6ES7972-0BB42-0XA0 (with PG connector)
6FX8002-1AA01-1AF0
PC/PG
G_D211_EN_00015 c
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Connection system
Signal cables
Integration
Connection overview for Line Modules and Motor Modules
The DRIVE-CLiQ type 6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0 cables for the standard configuration are part of the scope of supply of the Line
Modules and Motor Modules only if the control unit is mounted inside the respective Module (option K90 or K95), or if integration engineering is provided by the factory.
Motor Module
chassis
format
Order No.
Pre-assembled signal cables
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft)
X402 6FX2002-1DC00-....
≤ 70 m (230 ft)
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft)
X402 6FX2002-1DC00-....
≤ 70 m (230 ft)
Active Line
Module
X400X402
Smart Line
Module
X400X402
Basic Line
Module
X100X103
Control Unit
CU320-2
X400X402
Motor
Module
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
6FX2002-1DC00-....
X500
Active Interface
Module
Motion Controller
SIMOTION D
or
X400X402
Further
Motor
Modules
6
Motor encoder
interface via
SMC for motors
without
DRIVE-CLiQ
interface
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
X400- ≤ 5 m (16 ft)
X402 6FX2002-1DC00-....
≤ 70 m (230 ft)
Motor encoder
interface for
motors with
DRIVE-CLiQ
interface
X400X402
X400X402
6FX5002- 2DC10-....
≤ 100 m (328 ft)
6FX8002- 2DC10-....
≤ 50 m (164 ft)
X500
SMC101)
X500
SMC201)
X500
SMC301)
Absolute encoder with
DRIVE-CLiQ
6FX2001-5.D..
Motor encoder for
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
1FK/1FT/1PH/1PL6
G_D213_EN_00076b
SINAMICS S120
1) See connection overviews SMC10/SMC20/SMC30.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/25
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Connection system
Signal cables
Integration
Connection overview for connecting Sensor Modules to Line Modules and Motor Modules
Motor Module
Power Module
chassis
format
Order-No.
Pre-assembled signal cables
X500 SMC10 X520
Motor
encoder
interface via
SMC for
motors
without
DRIVE-CLiQ
interface
X400X402
X500 SMC20 X520
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
6FX.002-2CF02-....
50 m (164 ft) (multi-pole resolver)
130 m (427 ft) (2-pole resolver)
Resolver in 1FT/1FK/1FW3/
1PH7/1PL6 motor
6FX.002-2CA31-....
100 m (328 ft)
Incremental encoder sin/cos
1 Vpp with C/D track in
1FT/1FK/1FW3/1PH7/1PH4/
1PL6/1PM motor
6FX8002-2CA80-....
50 m (164 ft)
Incremental encoder sin/cos
1 Vpp without C/D track in
1PH7/1PH4/1PL6/1PM
motor
6FX.002-2CG00-....
50 m (164 ft)
Incremental encoder
sin/cos 1 Vpp
6FX2001-3...
6FX2002-1DC00-....
70 m (230 ft)
Adapter
cable5)
6FX.002-2EQ10-....
100 m (328 ft)
6
X500 SMC30 X520
X521
X531
X521
X531
1)
2)
3)
With evaluation of difference signals A*, A and B*, B, otherwise 100 m (328 ft).
Signals A*, A, B*, B, R*, R.
Signals A, B.
6/26
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Absolute encoder with EnDat
in 1FT/1FK/1FW3/1PH7/
1PH4/1PL6 motor
Direct linear absolute
encoder EnDat LC 183
LC 483
6FX.002-2CH00-....
100 m (328 ft)
Absolute encoder with
EnDat 6FX2001-5.E.
6FX.002-2CC11-....
100 m (328 ft)
Absolute encoder with SSI
6FX2001-5.S.
6FX.002-2CR00-....
100 m (328 ft) with 5 V DC
Incremental encoder TTL
RS 422 (5 V)
6FX2001-2...
6FX.002-2CD24-....
100 m (328 ft) with 24 V DC
Incremental encoder TTL
RS 422 (24 V)
6FX2001-2...
6FX5002-2CA12-....
100 m (328 ft)
Incremental encoder HTL
(24 V) 6FX2001-4....
6FX.002-2AH00-....
HTL 300 m (984 ft)1)
Incremental encoder HTL in
1PH7/1PH4/1PL6 motor
6SX7002-0AN00-.... 2)
X521
X531
Adapter
cable5)
Direct linear incremental
encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp
LS 187(C)/LF 183(C)
LB 382(C)
3)
Incremental encoder HTL
6SX7002-0AL00-....
type 1XP8001
300 m (984 ft) 1)
on 1LA motor 6)
6SX7002-0AN10-.... 4)
4) With right-angled connector
5) Cable available from measuring system manufacturer.
6) Not for 2KG geared motor.
G_D211_EN_00225c
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Connection system
Signal cables
Integration
Connection of a machine encoder (direct measuring system)
X100X1052)
Order No.
Pre-assembled cables
X500 SME20
6FX5002-2DC10-....
≤ 100 m (328 ft)
6FX8002-2DC10-....
≤ 50 m (164 ft)
X500 SME25
X520
X520
6FX.002-2CB54-....
≤ 3 m/10 m (9.8 ft/32.8 ft)1)
Incremental encoder
sin/cos 1 Vpp (5 V)
Absolute encoder
EnDat (5 V)
6FX.002-2AD04-....
≤ 3 m/10 m (9.8 ft/32.8 ft)1)
SSI absolute encoder with
incremental signals
sin/cos 1 Vpp (5 V)
Absolute encoder with
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
6FX2001-5.D..
X100X1052)
1)
2)
6SL3060-4A..0-0AA0
≤ 5 m (16 ft)
6FX2002-1DC00-....
≤ 70 m (230 ft)
X500 SMC30
X520
6FX.002-2CC11-....
≤ 100 m (328 ft)
Absolute encoder
with SSI
6FX2001-5.S..
G_D211_EN_00153d
SINAMICS S120
Control Unit
CU310, CU320-2
or
SIMOTION D410
SIMOTION D4x5
SIMOTION CX32
Depending on encoder current consumption.
For Control Unit CU310/SIMOTION D410: X100.
For Control Unit CU320-2/SIMOTION D425/SIMOTION D435/SIMOTION CX32: X100-X103.
For SIMOTION D445-1: X100-X105.
6
Selection and ordering data
Signal cable
Length
DRIVE-CLiQ pre-assembled cables (without 24 V DC cores)
In specific lengths
0.11 m (4.3”) 0.16 m (6.3”) 0.21 m (8.3”) 0.26 m (10.2”) 0.31 m (12.2”) 0.36 m (14.2”) 0.41 m (16.1”) 0.60 m (23.6”) 0.95 m (37.4”) 1.20 m (47.2”) 1.45 m (57.1”) 2.80 m (9.2 ft) 5.00 m (16.4 ft)
To the meter
70 m (230 ft)
70 m (230 ft)
Degree of protection (connector)
Basic cable
Order No.
IP20/IP20
6SL3060-4AB00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AD00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AF00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AH00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AK00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AM00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AP00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AU00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AA10-0AA0
6SL3060-4AW00-0AA0
6SL3060-4AF10-0AA0
6SL3060-4AJ20-0AA0
6SL3060-4AA50-0AA0
6FX2002-1DC00-….
6FX2002-1DC20-....
IP20/IP20
IP67/IP67
DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT 500 cables (with 24 V DC cores)
To the meter
100 m (328 ft)
IP20/IP20
100 m (328 ft)
IP20/IP67
100 m (328 ft)
IP67/IP67
DRIVE-CLiQ MOTION-CONNECT 800 cables (with 24 V DC cores)
To the meter
50 m (164 ft)
IP20/IP20
50 m (164 ft)
IP20/IP67
50 m (164 ft)
IP67/IP67
6FX5002-2DC00-....
6FX5002-2DC10-….
6FX5002-2DC20-….
6FX8002-2DC00-….
6FX8002-2DC10-.…
6FX8002-2DC20-….
Length code (refer to the next page) ….
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/27
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Connection system
Signal cables
Selection and ordering data
Length codes
Note: 1 m = 39.37” or 3.28 ft
Description
Order No. supplement
Length codes for pre-assembled cables
6FX....-.....-
0
6SX....-.....-
6
0m
1
100 m
200 m
2
3
300 m
0m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m
60 m
70 m
80 m
90 m
0m
1m
2m
3m
4m
5m
6m
7m
8m
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
9m
0m
0.1 m
0.2 m
0.3 m
0.4 m
0.5 m
0.6 m
0.7 m
0.8 m
Examples:
6/28
K
1.0 m:
2.2 m:
8.0 m:
299.0 m:
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
1
1
1
3
A
A
A
K
B
C
J
K
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
0
0
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
Safety Integrated functions
Safety-related standards
The integrated safety functions of SINAMICS provide highly
effective application-oriented protection for personnel and
machinery. The Safety Integrated functions are implemented
electronically and therefore offer short response times in
comparison to solutions with externally implemented
monitoring functions.
Functional safety is specified in various standards.
ISO 12100 and ISO 14121-1, for example, are concerned with
the design and risk assessment of machines. IEC 62061 (only
applicable for electrical and electronic control systems) and
ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1) define the functional and
safety-related requirements of control systems with relevance
to safety.
The trend toward greater complexity and increasing modularity of machines is increasingly seeing a shift in safety
functions away from the classical central safety functions (for
example, shutdown of the complete machine using a main
switch) and into the machine control system and the drives.
Frequently, this also significantly increases the productivity.
This is because, for instance, equipping times can be reduced
and during these equipping times, depending on the machine
type, other parts can still continue to produce.
Integrated safety functions act much faster than those of a
conventional design. The safety of a machine is increased
further with Safety Integrated. Furthermore, thanks to the
faster method of operation, safety measures controlled by
integrated safety systems are perceived as less of a hindrance
by the machine operator, therefore significantly reducing the
motivation to consciously bypass safety functions.
The safety functions in the device and communication via
PROFIsafe have already been certified. This simplifies configuring the safety functions and especially the acceptance of the plant or system by an authorized testing
body when compared to safety solutions made up of individual safety components.
The above-mentioned standards define different safety requirements that the machine has to satisfy in accordance
with the risk, frequency of a dangerous situation, probability
of occurrence and the opportunities for recognizing impending danger.
• ISO 13849-1: Control Category 1...4
• ISO 13849-1: Performance Level PL a … e
• IEC 62061: Safety Integrity Level SIL 1 … 3
Safety functions integrated in the drive with SINAMICS
The safety functions integrated in SINAMICS satisfy the requirements of
• Control Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1
• Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2 according to IEC 61508
• Performance Level (PL) d according to ISO 13849-1
In addition, the Safety Integrated functions of SINAMICS are
generally certified by independent institutes. An up-to-date
list of certified components is available on request from your
local Siemens office.
Legal framework
Machine and plant builders must ensure that their machines
or plants neither present risks due to electric shock, heat or
radiation nor due to functional faults. In Europe, for example,
compliance with the machinery directive is legally stipulated
by the EU industrial safety directive.
In order to ensure compliance with this directive, it is recommended that the corresponding harmonized European
standards are applied. This initiates the assumption of conformity and gives manufacturers and operators the legal
security when complying with both national regulations and
EU directives. The machine manufacturer uses the CE marking
to document the compliance with all relevant directives and
regulations in the free movement of goods.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/29
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
The Safety Integrated functions of the SINAMICS drive system
are subdivided into what are known as Safety Basic Functions
and Safety Extended Functions (terminology according to
IEC 61800-5-2):
• Basic Functions
- Safe Torque Off (STO)
- Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled)
- Safe Brake Control (SBC)
The Safety Basic functions are included in the standard scope
of delivery of the drive firmware and can be used without
requiring any additional license. The user can activate these
functions at any time. An encoder is not required for their
use. However, for the Safe Brake Control (SBC) function
a Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) is required for chassis format
Motor Modules.
6
The Safety Basic Functions are controlled as follows:
- Via terminals at the Control Unit and at the power unit, wired to a terminal interface in Cabinet Modules (option K82) and on the Safe Brake Adapter (option K88), when applicable.
- Via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with PROFIsafe profile (from
version 3 (last position of the Order No. ≥ 3) and Drives SW Version V2.6 SP2)
• Extended Functions
- Safe Torque Off (STO)
- Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled and acceleration
controlled)
- Safe Stop 2 (SS2)
- Safe Operating Stop (SOS)
- Safely-Limited Speed (SLS)
- Safe Speed Monitor (SSM)
- Safe Direction (SDI)
Safety Extended Functions require a safety license depending
on the axes (options K01 to K05). Depending on the control,
additional DRIVE-CLiQ components are required.
Note: For chassis format Motor Modules, Extended Safety
Functions require:
- either a sine-cosine encoder and therefore an SMC20
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted to evaluate the encoder signals (option K48).
- or two incremental encoders (TTL, HTL or SSI) and therefore two SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted to evaluate the encoder signals (options K50+K52).
The Safety Extended Functions are controlled as follows:
- Via the TM54F Terminal Module (option K87)
- Via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with the PROFIsafe profile
Extended Functions are available for SINAMICS S120 Motor
Modules, booksize and chassis formats from version 3 (last
position of the Order No. ≥ 3).
6/30
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
The Safety Integrated functions currently available in
SINAMICS S120 are described in more detail below
(terms as defined in IEC 61800-5-2):
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Function description
This function prevents unexpected starting according to
EN 60204-1 Section 5.4. Safe Torque Off disables the control
of the power unit, preventing a potentially hazardous torque
(corresponds to Stop Category 0 according to EN 60204-1).
The drive is reliably torque-free. This state is monitored
internally in the drive.
Under Extended Functions, STO can also be controlled via the
TM54F Terminal Module or PROFIsafe.
Application, customer benefits
STO has the immediate effect that the drive cannot supply
any torque-generating energy. STO can be used wherever the
drive will naturally reach a standstill due to load torque or
friction in a sufficiently short time or when “coasting down”
of the drive will not have any relevance for safety.
v
STO
G_D211_XX_00210
Safety Basic Functions and Safety Extended Functions
t
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
Safe Brake Control (SBC)
Function description
The Safe Brake Control SBC is used to control holding brakes,
which are active in the no-current state, e.g. motor holding
brakes (actuated using spring force). The brake is controlled
through two channels in a safety-relevant fashion.
Safe Brake Control is executed when activating the
operational brake control, Safe Torque Off function and when
safety monitoring functions respond, which cause the power
unit to be safely inhibited.
• Note 1: The Safe Brake Control does not detect mechanical
faults in the brake, for example worn brake pads.
• Note 2: For Motor Modules, Booksize Cabinet Kits format, the terminals for the motor brake are integrated. For the chassis format, an additional Safe Brake Adapter (SBA) is
required (option K88, for a description see pg. 6/37).
Application, customer benefits
In conjunction with STO and SS1, SBC can also be activated.
After switching off the torque-generating energy, SBC offers the possibility to safely control a holding brake at the
motor; for example, to prevent hanging/suspended axes from sagging.
Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time-controlled, without encoder;
Basic Safety Function)
Function description
The Safe Stop 1 function can safely stop the drive in
accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 1. When the
SS1 function is selected, the drive independently brakes along
a quick stop ramp (OFF3) and Safe Torque Off and Safe Brake
Control (if enabled) are activated when the selected safety
delay time has expired.
Application, customer benefits
When activating the stop function, if the drive train does not
come quickly enough to a standstill as a result of the load
torque, then it can be actively braked by the drive. As a result
of this integrated fast brake function, frequently it is possible
to eliminate mechanical brakes which wear, or to reduce the
load on them. This means that maintenance costs and stress
on the machine can be reduced.
STO
v
M
M
∆t
t
Safe Stop 1 (SS1, time and acceleration controlled,
with sine-cosine encoder; Extended Safety Function)
Function description
The Safe Stop 1 function can safely stop the drive in
accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 1. When the SS1
function is selected, the drive independently brakes along
a quick stop ramp, the deceleration is monitored (OFF3)
and Safe Torque Off and Safe Brake Control (if enabled) are
automatically activated when the selected safety delay time
has expired.
Application, customer benefits
When activating the stop function, if the drive train does not
come quickly enough to a standstill as a result of the load
torque, then it can be actively braked by the drive. As a result
of this integrated fast brake function, frequently it is possible
to eliminate mechanical brakes which wear, or to reduce the
load on them. This means that maintenance costs and stress
on the machine can be reduced.
STO
v
G_D211_XX_00205
Brake
diagnostics
Motor holding
brake
G_D213_EN_00090
P24
G_D211_XX_00205
Safe Brake Adapter
∆t
t
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/31
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
Safe Stop 2 (SS2, with sine-cosine encoder)
Safely-Limited Speed (SLS, with sine-cosine encoder)
Function description
Function description
The Safe Stop 2 function can safely stop the drive in accordance with EN 60204-1, Stop Category 2. When the
SS2 function is selected, the drive brakes autonomously along
a quick stop ramp (OFF3). In contrast to SS1, the drive control
remains operational afterwards, i.e. the motor can supply the
full torque required to maintain the actual position. Standstill
is safely monitored (Safe Operating Stop function, SOS).
Using the Safely-Limited Speed function, the drive is
monitored against a parameterizable maximum velocity.
Four different limit values can be activated. Just the same as
for SOS, the speed setpoint is not independently influenced.
After SLS has been selected, the higher-level control must
bring the drive to below the selected velocity limit within a
parameterizable time t.
Application, customer benefits
Application, customer benefits
When setting-up many machines operating personnel must
work on the machine as it rotates. This must either be done in
steps, because the dangerous area must always be exited at
each start, or alternatively, the operator works at the machine
while it moves and is therefore exposed to an increased risk.
When using the SLS function, a considerable amount of time
can be saved – and it is still guaranteed that the operating
personnel are safe. For this purpose, the drive velocity can
be safely limited to a safe low level. The selectable wait time
until SLS is activated allows the drive control to run-down the
coordinated axes in a controlled fashion.
Just the same as for SS1, the drive is independently braked
when the stop function is selected. Contrary to SS1, also at
standstill, the drive can provide the full torque.
STO
G_D211_XX_00205
v
∆t
SLS
v
G_D211_XX_00208
Safe Stop 1 (SS1) and Safe Stop 2 (SS2) with Safe
Acceleration Monitor (SAM, with sine-cosine encoder)
For the Extended Functions Safe Stop 1 (SS1) and Safe Stop 2
(SS2) with SAM, during braking, the acceleration is safely
monitored (SAM) in order to identify faults already during the
braking phase. Safe Operating Stop (SOS, with sine-cosine
encoder)
∆t
t
Safe Operating Stop 1 (SOS), with sine-cosine encoder)
Safe Speed Monitor (SSM, with sine-cosine encoder)
Function description
Function description
The Safe Speed Monitor function supplies a safety feedback
signal (high active) if the drive falls below a selectable velocity limit value. Contrary to the functions described
above, there is no drive-based fault response when the limit
value is exceeded.
The Safe Operating Stop function constitutes safe standstill
monitoring. The drive control remains in operation. The motor can therefore deliver the full torque to hold the current
position. The actual position is reliably monitored. In contrast
to safety functions SS1 and SS2, the speed setpoint is not
influenced autonomously. After SOS has been selected, the
higher-level control must bring the drive to a standstill within
a parameterized safe time Δt and then hold the position
setpoint. After the time t has expired, SOS is activated and
monitored to ensure that the actual standstill position is not left.
Application, customer benefits
SOS is the ideal function for all those applications for which
the machine or parts of the machine must be at a safe standstill for certain machining steps, but where the drive
must also supply a holding torque.
Application, customer benefits
The safety SSM feedback signal can be used in a higher-level
control for safety-relevant responses. The higher-level safety
control can flexibly respond to the signal, depending on the
particular situation, as there is no drive-based response when
the limit value is exceeded. For example, using the SSM signal, a protective door can be released after a non-hazardous
velocity is reached.
v
G_D211_XX_00209
SOS
s
1
∆t
6/32
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
G_D211_XX_00207
6
t
t
0
t
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
Safe Direction (SDI, with sine-cosine encoder)
PROFIsafe
Function description
PROFIsafe is an open communication standard, that facilitates
standard and safety-relevant communication along one communication path (hard-wired or wireless). As a consequence, a second, separate bus system is not required.
The telegrams that are sent are continually monitored to ensure safety-relevant communication. Possible errors such as telegrams that have been lost, repeated or received in the incorrect sequence etc. are avoided. This is done by consecutively numbering the telegrams in a safety-relevant
fashion, monitoring their reception within a defined time and
transferring an ID for transmitter and receiver of a telegram.
Further, a cyclic redundancy check CRC (cyclic redundancy
check) is performed.
The SDI function ensures that the drive can only rotate in the
selected direction.
Deviation from the direction of rotation currently being monitored is detected reliably and the configured drive-integrated fault reaction is initiated. It is possible to select which
direction of rotation is to be monitored.
Application, customer benefits
The SDI function is used when the drive may only move in
one direction. A typical application is to permit the operator
access to a danger zone, as long as the machine is rotating in
the safe direction, i.e. away from the operator. In this state,
the operator can feed material into the work zone/remove
material from the work zone without danger.
The function saves the use of external components e.g. speed
monitors and the associated wiring. The release of a danger
zone, while the machine is moving away from the operator,
increases productivity. Without the SDI function, the machine
must be safely stopped during material loading and removal.
SINAMICS 120 supports the PROFIsafe profile, based on
PROFIBUS as well as on PROFINET.
Licensing
The Safety Integrated Basic Functions do not require a license.
A license is, however, required for each axis with safety
functions in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions.
It is irrelevant which safety functions are used and how many.
Licenses required for SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules can be
ordered, depending on the axes, with safety options K01 to
K05 for Motor Modules.
t
SDI
G_PM21_XX_00116
v
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/33
6
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Function
An overview of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated functions plus their boundary conditions is provided in the following table.
Function
Control
Underlying function
Reaction to
limit overshoot
Encoder
required
License
required
Safety Basic Functions
STO
• EP terminals on the power
unit and digital input at the
CU3xx/D4xx/CX32
• PROFIsafe
• Terminal module (24 V to 230 V),option K82 1)
SBC (if activated)
–
No
No
SS1
• EP terminals on the power
unit and digital input at the
CU3xx/D4xx/CX32
• PROFIsafe
• Terminal module (24 V to 230 V), option K82 1)
STO, after a parameterized
delay time has expired
STO
No
No
SBC
• Via Safe Brake Adapter 2)
–
–
No
No
Safety Extended Functions
6
STO
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
SBC (if activated
–
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SS1
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
STO is activated after the
shutdown conditions have
been fulfilled
STO
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SBC
• Via Safe Brake Adapter
–
–
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SS2
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
STO is activated after the
shutdown conditions have
been fulfilled
STO
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SLS
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
Up to four maximum speeds
for operation can be
parameterized
STO, SS1 or
SOS (can be
parameterized)
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SOS
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
For closed-loop speed control:
The position is monitored from
standstill
STO or SS1 (can
Yes 4)
be parameterized)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SSM
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
Safe limit value monitoring in
both directions of rotation, no
independent drive response. A
safety-relevant signal for further
operation is generated.
–
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
SDI
• Terminals on the TM54F 3)
• PROFIsafe
–
STO, SS1 or
SOS (can be
parameterized)
Yes 4)
Yes (each safety
axis)
1) In addition for SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules.
2) Safe Brake Adapter has been released from firmware version 4.4.
3) For SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules as option K87.
4) The Safety Integrated Extended Functions require either a sine-cosine
encoder or two incremental encoders to sense the motor speed. Possible encoder evaluation units units SMC20, SMI20, SME20/25/120/125 or SMC30.
6/34
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safety integrated
Safety integrated
Function
The principle of operation of Safety Integrated
Two independent shutdown paths
There are two shutdown paths that are independent of one
another.
All shutdown paths are low active. This therefore ensures that
when a component fails or there is a wire break, then the
system always goes into the safe state. When a fault is
detected in the shutdown paths, the Safe Torque Off or Safe
Stop 1 function (depending on the parameterization, also
refer to the table on the Page 3/13) is activated and a restart
is prevented.
Two-channel monitoring structure
All of the hardware and software functions important for
Safety Integrated are implemented in two independent
monitoring channels (e.g. shutdown paths, data
management, data comparison). The safety-relevant data
in the two monitoring channels is cyclically compared
crosswise.
The monitoring functions in each monitoring channel are
based on the principle that before a particular action, there
must be a defined state, and after the action there must be
a specific feedback. If this expectation is not fulfilled in a
monitoring channel, then the drive is shutdown through two
channels and the appropriate signal output.
Forced checking procedure using a test stop
In order to fulfill the requirements of ISO 13849-1 (previously
EN 954-1) and IEC 61508 regarding early fault detection,
the functions and the shutdown paths must be tested within
a specific time period at least once to ensure that they are
operating correctly. This must be realized either cyclically and
manually or the test stop must be automatically initiated as
part of the process.
The test stop cycle is monitored, and after a specific time
has been exceeded, an alarm is output.
A test stop does not require a power on. The acknowledgment
is realized when deselecting the test stop request. When the
machine is operational, it can be assumed that there is no risk
for personnel as a result of the appropriate safety equipment
(e.g. protective doors). As a consequence, the user is only
made aware of the forced checking procedure that is required
using an alarm, and is requested to perform the forced
checking procedure at the next possible opportunity.
Examples for performing the forced checking procedure:
• When the drives are stationary after switching-on
the system
• Before opening the protective door
• In a specified rhythm (e.g. every 8 hours)
• In the automatic mode, time and event-triggered
6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/35
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
TM54F Terminal Module
Overview
Design
The following are located on the TM54F Terminal Module:
• 4 fail-safe digital outputs
• 10 fail-safe digital inputs
• 4 LEDs, single color for indicating the status of the read back
channel of the fail-safe digital outputs
• 4 LEDs, dual-color for indicating the status of the fail-safe
digital outputs
• 20 LEDs, dual-color for indicating the status of the fail-safe
digital inputs
• 3 LEDs, single color for indicating the status of the 24 V sensor supplies
• 2 connections for 24 V sensor supply, switchable
• 1 connection for 24 V sensor supply, non-switchable
The TM54F Terminal Module (option K87) is a dual-processor
I/O interface with 4 fail-safe digital outputs and 10 fail-safe
digital inputs for using Safety Integrated functions of the SINAMICS S120 drive system via external actuators and sensors.
6
All of the available safety functions integrated in the drive
can be controlled via the fail-safe digital inputs of the TM54F
Terminal Module. For the case that the parameterized safety
functions of several drives operated together on a CU320-2
or SIMOTION D4x5 are to be executed together, then these
drives can be grouped in the TM54F Terminal Module. This
has the advantage that only one fail-safe digital input has to
be connected for these drives.
The fail-safe digital outputs and inputs have two channels
with an internal crosswise data comparison via the two
processors. A fail-safe digital output consists of one
P-switching and one M-switching output as well as one digital
input to read back the switching state. A fail-safe digital input
consists of two digital inputs.
Safety sensors can be connected over two switchable 24 V
sensor supplies and evaluated via the fail-safe digital inputs.
The switchable 24 V sensor supply ensures that the fail-safe
digital inputs can be dynamized to detect dormant errors (this
dynamization is used to check the shutdown paths). An nonswitchable 24 V sensor supply is additionally provided by the
TM54F Terminal Module for connecting safety sensors that
cannot be dynamized.
The TM54F Terminal Module is connected directly to a Control
Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. Each Control Unit can only be assigned to
one TM54F Terminal Module.
Additional DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as Sensor Modules and
Terminal Modules (however no additional TM54F Terminal
Module) can be operated on the TM54F Terminal Module.
Motor Modules and Line Modules must not be connected to a
TM54F Terminal Module.
6/36
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
The signal cable shield can be connected to the TM54F Terminal Module via a shield connection terminal, e.g.
Phoenix Contact type SK8 or Weidmüller type KLBÜ CO 1.
The shield connection terminal must not be used for
strain relief.
The status of the TM54F Terminal Module is indicated via a
multicolor LED.
Pins for connector coding are included in the TM54F Terminal
Module scope of delivery.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
TM54F Terminal Module
TM54F Terminal Module
Technical data
TM54F Terminal Module
TM54F Terminal Module
Current demand
(X524 at 24 V DC) without
DRIVE-CLiQ supply
0.2 A
Scanning cycle tSI
for fail-safe digital inputs or fail-safe
digital outputs
4 ... 25 ms (adjustable)
Max. current demand ext. 24 V
or supplying the digital outputs and
24 V sensor supply (X514 at 24 V DC)
I/O devices
• Number of fail-safe digital inputs
• Number of fail-safe digital outputs
• 24 V sensor supply
4A
Conformity
Approvals, according to
Safety Integrated
CE
cULus
Safety Integrity Level 2
(SIL2) acc. to IEC 61508,
Performance Level d (PLd)
acc. to ISO 13849-1 and
Control Category 3 acc. to
ISO 13849-1 (previously EN 954-1)
• Connection system
• Wire size, max.
10
4 3, of which 2 can be internally shut down to dynamize fail-safe digital
inputs, current carrying
capacity of input is 0.5 A
Plug-in screw-type terminals
#14 AWG (1.5 mm 2 )
Digital inputs
According to IEC 61131-2 Type 1,
with electrical isolation
• Voltage
-3 ... +30 V
• Low level
-3 ... +5 V
(an open digital input is interpreted as “low”)
• High level
15 ... 30 V
6
• Current consumption at 24V DC, typ. >2 mA
• Delay time of digital inputs, approx 1)
- L
H, typ.
30 s
- H
L, typ.
60 s
• Safe state
Digital outputs
Continuously short-circuit proof
• Voltage
Low level (for inputs that can be inverted: without
inversion)
24 V DC
• Load current per fail-safe digital output max. 2)
• Delay times (resistive load) 1)
0.5 A
- L H, typ.
300 s
- H
L, typ.
350 s
• Safe state
Output switched off
1) The specified delay times refer to the hardware. The actual reaction time
depends on the time slot in which the digital input/output is processed.
2) The total current of all fail-safe digital outputs must not exceed 5.33 A.
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
6/37
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Safe Brake Adapter SBA
Overview
Safe Brake Adapter
Option K88
Supply voltage of the
motor holding brake
230 V AC
Max. permissible current
consumption of the
• Motor holding brake
2A
• Fast de-energization
2A
Max, permissable cable
lengths
• to the brake
990 ft (300 m)
Max. wire size
#12 AWG
(2.5 mm2)
Safety Integrated
Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL2) acc.
to IEC 61508, Performance Level d
(PLd) acc. to ISO 13849-1 and Control Category 3 acc. to ISO
13849-1 (previously EN 954-1)
A Safe Brake Adapter SBA is required to safely control a motor
holding brake via the Safe Brake Control (SBC) safety function
according to IEC 61800-5-2.
The Safe Brake Adapter is available for 230 V AC brake control voltages.
It is available as option K88 or SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules.
6
Note: The SBA approval is currently only valid for IEC regions.
The SBA is not yet UL listed and may not be included in a UL
listed Cabinet Module line-up.
6/38
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
Integration
The SBC function is controlled and monitored by the
SINAMICS Drives firmware. The control and feedback signal
regarding the switching state of the SBA relay is realized via terminals of the Control Interface Module (CIM). The
excitation coil of the holding brake is connected directly at
the SBA.
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Engineering Tools,5Service & Support
7
7/2
Engineering software
Sizer for Siemens drives
STARTER commissioning tool
Drive Control Chart
7/6
Service & Support
Service tool for exchanging power blocks
Spare parts
Complete lifecycle services
Service & Support contacts
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Engineering software
SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool
The configuration process produces the following results:
• A parts list of the required components (export to Excel,
use of the Excel data sheet for import to SAP)
• Technical specifications of the system
• Characteristic curves
• Comments on system reactions
• Mounting arrangement of drive and control components and dimension drawings of motors
• Energy requirements of the configured application
These results are displayed in a results tree and can be reused
for documentation purposes.
Technological online help is available:
• Detailed technical specifications
• Information about the drive systems and their components
• Decision-making criteria for the selection of components
• Online help in German, English, French, Italian, Chinese and Japanese
The following drives and controls can be engineered in a
user-friendly way using the SIZER for Siemens Drives
engineering tool:
• SINAMICS Low Voltage, MICROMASTER 4, DYNAVERT T,
SIMATIC ET 200S FC and SIMATIC ET 200pro FC drive systems
• Motor starters
• SINUMERIK CNC control
• SIMOTION Motion Control System
• SIMATIC Technology
7
It provides support when setting up the technologies involved
in the hardware and firmware components required for a
drive task. SIZER for Siemens Drives covers the full range of
operations required to configure a complete drive system,
from simple single drives to complex multi-axis applications.
SIZER for Siemens Drives supports all of the configuring steps
in a workflow:
•Configuring the power supply
•Selecting the motor and gearbox, including calculation
of mechanical transmission elements
•Configuring the drive components
•Compiling the required accessories
•Selecting the line-side and motor-side power options,
e.g., cables, filters, and reactors
When SIZER for Siemens Drives was being designed,
particular importance was placed on a high degree of
usability and a universal, function-based approach to the
drive application. The extensive user guidance makes using
the tool easy. Status information keeps you continually
informed about the progress of the configuration process.
The SIZER for Siemens Drives user interface is available in
German, English, French and Italian.
The drive configuration is saved in a project. In the project,
the components and functions used are displayed in a
hierarchical tree structure.
The project view permits the configuration of drive systems and the copying/inserting/modifying of drives already configured.
7/2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
System requirements
• PG or PC with Pentium III min. 800 MHz
(recommended > 1 GHz)
• 512 MB RAM (1 GB RAM recommended)
• At least 4.1 GB of free hard disk space
• An additional 100 MB of free hard disk space on the Windows system drive
• Screen resolution 1024 × 768 pixels (recommended
1280 × 1024 pixels)
• Operating system
- Windows XP Home Edition SP2
- Windows XP Professional 32 bit SP2
- Windows XP Professional 64 bit SP2
- Windows Vista Business
- Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit
- Windows 7 Professional 32 bit
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2
Selection and ordering data
Order No.
SIZER for Siemens Drives
engineering tool
DVD-ROM
German, English, French, Italian
6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0
More information
The SIZER for Siemens Drives engineering tool is available free
on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/sizer
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Engineering software
STARTER commissioning tool
For experts, the expert list can be used to specifically and
quickly access individual parameters at any time. An individual compilation of frequently used parameters can be
saved in dedicated user lists and watch tables.
The user-friendly STARTER commissioning tool can be used for
• Commissioning
• Optimization
• Diagnostics
This software can be operated either as a standalone PC
application, integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 with TIA
compatibility via Drive ES Basic, or it can be integrated into
the SCOUT engineering system (for SIMOTION). The basic
functions and handling are the same in both cases.
Configuring can be realized both offline as well as online. If
several drives are connected to the selected communication
bus, then an online connection can be established to several
drives simultaneously.
The project wizards can be used to create the drives within
the structure of the project tree.
Beginners are supported by solution-based dialog guidance,
whereby a standard graphics-based display maximizes clarity
when setting the drive parameters.
First commissioning is guided by a wizard which makes all the
basic settings in the drive. Therefore, getting a motor up and
running is merely a question of setting a few of the drive
parameters as part of the drive configuration process.
The travel commands can be simply entered via the control
panel from the PC.
The individual settings can be made using the graphic
parameterizing screen forms, which precisely visualize the
drive mode of operation.
Examples of individual settings that can be made include:
• How terminals are used
• Bus interface
• Setpoint channel (e.g., fixed setpoints)
• Closed-loop speed control (e.g., ramp-function
generator, limits)
• BICO interconnections
• Diagnostics
In addition, the following functions are available for
optimization purposes:
• Self-optimization of the controller settings
(depending on the drive unit)
• Trace to precisely record the signals
(this depends on the drive unit, is not supported for
- MICROMASTER 4
- SINAMICS G110
- SINAMICS G120 < FW V4.4
- SINAMICS G110D
- SINAMICS G120D
- SIMATIC ET 200S FC
- SIMATIC ET 200pro FC)
• Numerous measuring functions such as step functions and
frequency response analysis
Diagnostics functions provide information about:
• Control/status words
• Parameter status
• Conditions of use
• Communication states
Performance features
• User-friendly: Only a small number of settings need to be
made for successful first commissioning: The motor starts to rotate
• Solution-oriented dialog-based user guidance simplifies commissioning
• Self-optimization functions reduce manual optimization work.
System requirements V4.2 and higher
• PG or PC Pentium III min. 1 GHz (recommended > 1 GHz)
• 1 GB RAM (recommended 2 GB RAM)
• Screen resolution 1024 ×768 pixels, 16 bit color depth
• Free hard disk memory min. 3 GB
• Software
- Microsoft Internet Explorer V6.0 or higher
- 32 bit operating systems:
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional incl. SP1
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate incl. SP1
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise incl. SP1 (Standard Installation)
- 64 bit operating systems:
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional SP1
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate SP1
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise SP1 (Standard Installation)
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
7/3
7
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Engineering software
Integration
The fieldbus communication between the Control Units of SINAMICS S120, SINAMICS S150, SINAMICS G130 and
SINAMICS G150 can, depending on the CU version (DP or PN), be realized via PROFIBUS or PROFINET/Ethernet,
alternatively, also via the serial RS232 interface.
Further, there is the option of coupling SINAMICS S120,
SINAMICS S150, SINAMICS G130, SINAMICS G150 and
SINAMICS DC MASTER via SINAMICS Link, e.g. to establish
a setpoint cascade.
For commissioning and service, a PG/PC can be connected
to the CU320-2 Control Unit via PROFIBUS. A PROFIBUS
connection must be available with a connecting cable at
the PG/PC.
Further, communication between a CU320-2 Control Unit
and PG/PC can also be established via Ethernet, either via
an (optional) CBE20 Communication Board or the Ethernet
interface -X127 on the CU320-2 Control Unit.
Note on -X127:
This terminal block is only intended for communication
between a PG/PC for service and commissioning.
Selection and ordering data
Order No.
STARTER commissioning tool
For SINAMICS and MICROMASTER
on DVD-ROM
German, English, French, Italian, Spanish
6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0
Accessories
SIMATIC S7 connecting cable
RS232 null modem cable, 6 m
6ES7901-1BF00-0XA0
PROFIBUS communication module
CP 5512
PCMCIA type 2 card + adapter with 9-pin
SUB-D socket,
for Windows 2000/Windows XP
Professional and PCMCIA 32
6GK1551-2AA00
SIMATIC DP plug-in cable
12 Mbit/s, for PG connection,
pre-assembled with 2 × 9-pin SUB-D
connector, 3 m
6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0
PROFINET/Ethernet
Standard-CAT5 Ethernet cable or
PROFINET cable
More information
The STARTER commissioning tool is also available for update
purposes on the Internet at www.siemens.com/starter
7
7/4
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Engineering software
Drive Control Chart (DCC)
Drive Control Chart (DCC) expands the scope of device
functions by means of freely available closed-loop control,
calculation and logic modules and offers a means by which
technological functions can be graphically configured in the
SINAMICS S120 drive system. DCC is installed as an additional
application to the STARTER commissioning tool.
The block library encompasses a large selection of closedloop, arithmetic and logic blocks, as well as comprehensive
open loop and closed-loop control functions.
For logically combining, evaluating and acquiring binary
signals, all commonly used logic functions are available for
selection (AND, XOR, on/off delay, RS flipflop, counter, etc.).
A wide range of arithmetic functions, such as absolute
value generation blocks, dividers and minimum/maximum
evaluation are available to monitor and evaluate numerical
quantities. In addition to the closed-loop drive control, axial
winder functions, closed-loop PI controllers, ramp-function
generators or wobble generators can be configured simply
and easily.
Drive Control Chart for SINAMICS S120 also provides a convenient basis for resolving drive-level open-loop and
closed-loop control tasks directly in the converter. This further
extends the possibility of adapting SINAMICS to the particular
application. Local data processing in the drive supports the
implementation of modular machine concepts and results in
an increase in the overall machine performance.
Minimum hardware and software requirements
See the STARTER engineering software, since DCC is installed
in addition to this.
Selection and ordering data (options)
DCC comprises the graphic configuring tool (DCC Editor) and
the block library (DCB library).
DCC is installed in addition to the SCOUT or STARTER
engineering software.
The engineering license required for each PC (floating) for
DCC is purchased at the same time the order is placed; additional runtime licenses are not required.
DCC can be ordered in two versions: as version for SIMOTION
and SINAMICS applications, or as version for SINAMICS
applications only.
Existing licenses for DCC V2.1 can also be used for DCC V2.2 SP1.
An upgrade variant for the engineering license can be selected for existing DCC V2.0 versions.
Description
Drive Control Chart expands the possibility for very simply
configuring technological functions, both for the SIMOTION
motion control system as well as for the SINAMICS S120 drive system. For users, this opens up a new dimension
regarding the adaptability of the systems mentioned to the
specific functions of their machines.
DCC has no restrictions with regard to the number of usable
functions; this is only limited by the performance capability of
the target platform.
The user-friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows control loop structures to be clearly
represented and provides a high degree of reusability of
diagrams that have already been created.
The open-loop and closed-loop control functions are defined
by using multi-instance-capable blocks (Drive Control Blocks
(DCBs)) from a pre-defined library (DCB library) that are
selected and graphically linked with one another by dragging and dropping. Test and diagnostic functions allow the program behavior to be verified and, in the case
of a fault, the cause identified.
DCC SIMOTION/SINAMICS V2.2 SP1
for SCOUT/STARTER V4.3 SP1
Graphical configuration with drive Control Chart
DCC Editor + DCB library for use on
SIMOTION and SINAMICS S120
• Single Engineering License, with data carrier
• Upgrade Engineering License,
with data carrier
DCC SINAMICS V2.2 SP1
for STARTER V4.3 SP1
Graphical configuration with drive Control Chart
DCC Editor + DCB library for use on
SINAMICS S120
• Single Engineering License, with data carrier
• Upgrade Engineering License,
with data carrier
Order No.
6AU1810-1JA22-1XA0
6AU1810-1JA22-1XE0
6AU1810-1HA22-1XA0
6AU1810-1HA22-1XE0
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
7/5
7
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Service tool
Service tool
Spare Parts
Mounting device for power blocks
SparesOnWeb – Online spart parts catalog
Power block mounting device for installing and removing the
power blocks for Basic Line Modules, Smart Line Modules,
Active Line modules and Motor Modules in chassis format.
SparesOnWeb is a web-based tool for determining the spare
parts available for a SINAMICS drive. After you have registered
and entered the serial number and order number, the spare
parts available for the relevant unit are displayed.
The mounting device is a mounting aid. It is placed in the
front of the module and attached to the module. The
telescopic rails allow the device to be adjusted to the
installation height of the power blocks.
Once the mechanical and electrical connections have been
released, the power block can be removed from the module.
7
The power block is guided and supported by the guide rails
on the handling device.
Selection and ordering data
Description
Order No.
Mounting device
for installing and removing power blocks
6SL3766-1FA00-0AA0
7/6
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
www.siemens.com/sow
SINAMICS S120 Cabinet Modules
Service & Support
Complete life cycle service
For machine constructors, solution providers and plant
operators: The service offering from Siemens industry,
Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive
services for a wide range of different users in all sectors of
the manufacturing and process industry.
Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all
matters concerning automation and drives from Siemens.
We provide direct on-site support in more than 100
countries through all phases of the life cycle of your
machines and plants.
To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated
and structured services that provide valuable support in
every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant – from
planning and implementation through commissioning as far
as maintenance and modernization.
You have an experienced team of specialists at your side
to provide active support and bundled know-how. Regular
training courses and intensive contact among our employees
– even across continents – ensure reliable service in the
most diverse areas.
Training
Start-up and maintenance training
Siemens Industry offers the following course for SINAMICS S120:
Course name: SINAMICS S Setup & Maintenance
Course code: SCT-DVSNAM1A
Duration: 4¹⁄₂ Days
This course provides training on Siemens’ SINAMICS S drive systems family. Student will gain experience necessary to setup
and maintain the operation of the SINAMICS S. The course includes an analysis of required hardware, steps for a quick startup,
as well as additional application dependent steps for configuration, tuning and troubleshooting. A working knowledge of
the drive communications capabilities will also be presented. The course also covers the extensive diagnostic capabilities of
the drive.
Please see the Siemens Industry SITRAIN Internet site for dates and costs of scheduled classes at:
http://www.usa.siemens.com/training
Service & Support Contacts
Pre-sales Support, Order Entry
Please contact your local sales office.
GA400 facility, Alpharetta, GA
Phone: (770) 740-3000 e-mail: [email protected]
Technical Support
Inside USA, toll free: 1-800-333-7421
Outside USA: +1(423)262-5710
Online request: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
Customer Service, Field Services, Spare Parts & Repair
Inside USA, toll free: 1-800-241-4453
Outside USA: +1(423)262-5711
e-mail: [email protected]
Siemens D21.7 – 2013
7/7
7
Siemens Industry, Inc.
3333 Old Milton Parkway
Alpharetta, GA 30005
1-800-241-4453
[email protected]
www.usa.siemens.com/drives
Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No: DRCA-D2171-0313
All rights reserved.
Printed in USA.
©2013 Siemens Industry, Inc.
The information provided in this brochure contains merely general
descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use
do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further
development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective
characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract.
Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Product names mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies. Specificationsare subject to change
without notice.
Similar pages